DCGS-2828XBGUI User Guide
28-Ports L2+ Managed GbE Switch

Release A2© Data ControlsI Inc.. All rights reserved. All brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective companiesiAbout This Manual

Copyright

Copyright © Data Controls Inc.. All rights reserved.
The products and programs described in this User Guide are licensed products of Data Controls
Inc., This User Guide contains proprietary information protected by copyright, and this User Guide
and all accompanying hardware, software and documentation are copyrighted. No parts of thisUser Guide may be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated or reduced to any electronic
medium or machine-readable from by any means by electronic or mechanical. Including
photocopying, recording, or information storage and retrieval systems, for any purpose other thanthe purchaser’s personal use, and without the prior express written permission of Data Controls
Inc..

.

PurposeThis GUI user guide gives specific information on how to operate and use the management
functions of the DCGS-2828XB via HTTP/HTTPs web browser

Audience

The Manual is intended for use by network administrators who are responsible for operating andmaintaining network equipment; consequently, it assumes a basic working knowledge of generalswitch functions, the Internet Protocol (IP), and Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP).

CONVENTIONS

The following conventions are used throughout this manual to show information.

WARRANTY

See the Customer Support/ Warranty booklet included with the product. A copy of the specificwarranty terms applicable to your Manufacture products and replacement parts can be obtained
from your Manufacture Sales and Service Office authorized dealer.

Disclaimer

Data Controls Inc. does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments andapplications, and marks no warranty and representation, either implied or expressed, with respect
to the quality, performance, merchantability, or fitness for a particular purpose. Manufacture
disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred. Information in thisUser Guide is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the partof Manufacture. Manufacture assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may becontained in this User Guide. Manufacture makes no commitment to update or keep current the
information in this User Guide, and reserves the righter to make improvements to this User Guide
and /or to the products described in this User Guide, at any time without notice.

ii

Table of Contents.................................................................................................................................................................... II
ABOUT THIS MANUAL ............................................................................................................................. II
Revision History ........................................................................................................................................ viii
INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................................................ 1
CHAPTER 1

OPERATION OF WEB-BASED MANAGEMENT .......................................................... 3

CHAPTER 2

SYSTEM ......................................................................................................................... 5

2-1 SYSTEM INFORMATION ................................................................................................................................... 5
2-2 IP ADDRESS .................................................................................................................................................. 8
2-2.1 Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 8
2-2.2 Advanced Settings ........................................................................................................................... 10
2-2.3 Status ................................................................................................................................................ 14
2-3 SYSTEM TIME............................................................................................................................................... 18
2-4 LLDP .......................................................................................................................................................... 21
2-4.1 LLDP Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 21
2-4.2 LLDP-MED Configuration ............................................................................................................... 24
2-4.3 LLDP Neighbour .............................................................................................................................. 32
2-4.4 LLDP-MED Neighbour ..................................................................................................................... 34
2-4.5 LLDP Neighbour EEE ....................................................................................................................... 38
2-4.6 LLDP Statistics .................................................................................................................................. 40
2-5 UPNP ......................................................................................................................................................... 42
2-6 OSPF ......................................................................................................................................................... 44
2-6.1 Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 44
2-6.2 Status ................................................................................................................................................ 57
CHAPTER 3

PORT MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................... 65

3-1 PORT CONFIGURATION................................................................................................................................. 65
3-2 PORT STATISTICS .......................................................................................................................................... 67
3-3 SFP PORT INFO ........................................................................................................................................... 71
3-4 ENERGY EFFICIENT ETHERNET ....................................................................................................................... 73
3-5 LINK AGGREGATION ..................................................................................................................................... 74
3-5.1 Static Configuration ........................................................................................................................ 74
3-5.2 LACP Configuration......................................................................................................................... 76
3-5.3 System Status ................................................................................................................................... 78
3-5.4 Internal Status.................................................................................................................................. 79
3-5.5 Neighbor Status ............................................................................................................................... 81
3-5.6 Port Status ........................................................................................................................................ 83
3-6 LOOP PROTECTION ...................................................................................................................................... 85
3-6.1 Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 85
3-6.2 Status ................................................................................................................................................ 87
3-7 UDLD ........................................................................................................................................................ 89
3-7.1 UDLD Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 89
3-7.2 UDLD Status ..................................................................................................................................... 91
CHAPTER 4

VLAN MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................... 93

4-1 VLAN CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................................... 93
4-2 VLAN MEMBERSHIP .................................................................................................................................... 97
4-3 VLAN PORT STATUS .................................................................................................................................... 99
4-4 MAC-BASED VLAN .................................................................................................................................. 101
4-4.1 Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 101
4-4.2 Status .............................................................................................................................................. 103
iv

4-5 PROTOCOL-BASED VLAN........................................................................................................................... 104
4-5.1 Protocol to Group .......................................................................................................................... 104
4-5.2 Group to VLAN .............................................................................................................................. 107
4-6 IP SUBNET-BASED VLAN ........................................................................................................................... 109
4-7 GVRP ....................................................................................................................................................... 111
4-8 PRIVATE VLAN .......................................................................................................................................... 113
4-9 PORT ISOLATION ........................................................................................................................................ 115
4-10 VOICE VLAN .......................................................................................................................................... 116
4-10.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 116
4-10.2 OUI................................................................................................................................................ 118
CHAPTER 5

QUALITY OF SERVICE ...............................................................................................120

5-1 PORT CLASSIFICATION ................................................................................................................................ 120
5-2 PORT POLICERS ......................................................................................................................................... 123
5-3 PORT SHAPERS .......................................................................................................................................... 125
5-4 STORM CONTROL ...................................................................................................................................... 127
5-5 PORT SCHEDULER ...................................................................................................................................... 129
5-6 PORT PCP REMARKING .............................................................................................................................. 131
5-7 DSCP ....................................................................................................................................................... 133
5-7.1 Port DSCP ....................................................................................................................................... 133
5-7.2 DSCP Translation .......................................................................................................................... 135
5-7.3 DSCP Classification ....................................................................................................................... 137
5-7.4 DSCP-Based QoS ........................................................................................................................... 139
5-8 QOS CONTROL LIST................................................................................................................................... 141
5-8.1 Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 141
5-8.2 Status .............................................................................................................................................. 146
5-9 QOS STATISTICS ......................................................................................................................................... 148
5-10 WRED ................................................................................................................................................... 149
CHAPTER 6

SPANNING TREE .......................................................................................................151

6-1 STP CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................................ 151
6-2 MSTI CONFIGURATION .............................................................................................................................. 154
6-3 STP STATUS .............................................................................................................................................. 158
6-4 PORT STATISTICS ........................................................................................................................................ 162
CHAPTER 7

MAC ADDRESS TABLES ............................................................................................164

7-1 CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................................................................... 164
7-2 INFORMATION ........................................................................................................................................... 167
CHAPTER 8

MULTICAST ...............................................................................................................169

8-1 IGMP SNOOPING...................................................................................................................................... 169
9-1.1 Basic Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 169
8-1.2 VLAN Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 172
8-1.3 Status .............................................................................................................................................. 174
8-1.4 Group Information......................................................................................................................... 176
8-1.5 IGMP SFM Information.................................................................................................................. 178
8-2 MLD SNOOPING ....................................................................................................................................... 180
8-2.1 Basic Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 180
8-2.2 VLAN Configuration ...................................................................................................................... 183
8-2.3 Status .............................................................................................................................................. 185
8-2.4 Groups Information ....................................................................................................................... 187
8-2.5 MLD SFM Information ................................................................................................................... 189
8-3 MVR ........................................................................................................................................................ 191
8-3.1 Basic Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 191
8-3.2 Statistics.......................................................................................................................................... 194v

8-3.3 Groups Information ....................................................................................................................... 196
8-3.4 SFM Information ............................................................................................................................ 198
8-4 MULTICAST FILTERING PROFILE ................................................................................................................... 200
8-4.1 Filtering Profile Table .................................................................................................................... 200
8-4.2 Filtering Address Entry .................................................................................................................. 203
CHAPTER 9

DHCP ..........................................................................................................................205

9-1 SNOOPING ................................................................................................................................................ 205
9-1.1 Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 205
9-1.2 Snooping Table .............................................................................................................................. 207
9-1.3 Detailed Statistics .......................................................................................................................... 209
9-2 RELAY ....................................................................................................................................................... 211
9-2.1 Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 211
9-2.2 Statistics.......................................................................................................................................... 213
9-3 SERVER ..................................................................................................................................................... 215
9-3.1 Configuration ................................................................................................................................. 215
9-3.2 Status .............................................................................................................................................. 217
CHAPTER 10

SECURITY .................................................................................................................218

10-1 MANAGEMENT ........................................................................................................................................ 218
10-1.1 Account ........................................................................................................................................ 218
10-1.2 Privilege Levels ............................................................................................................................ 220
10-1.3 Auth Method ................................................................................................................................ 221
10-1.4 Access Method ............................................................................................................................. 224
10-1.5 HTTPS ........................................................................................................................................... 226
10-2 802.1X................................................................................................................................................... 228
10-2.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 228
10-2.2 Status ............................................................................................................................................ 236
10-3 IP SOURCE GUARD .................................................................................................................................. 238
10-3.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 238
10-3.2 Static Table .................................................................................................................................. 240
10-3.3 Dynamic Table............................................................................................................................. 242
10-4 ARP INSPECTION..................................................................................................................................... 244
10-4.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 244
10-4.2 VLAN Configuration .................................................................................................................... 246
10-4.3 Static Table .................................................................................................................................. 248
10-4.4 Dynamic Table............................................................................................................................. 250
10-5 PORT SECURITY ....................................................................................................................................... 252
10-5.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 252
10-5.2 Status ............................................................................................................................................ 255
10-6 RADIUS ................................................................................................................................................. 258
10-6.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 258
10-6.2 Status ............................................................................................................................................ 261
10-7 TACACS+ .............................................................................................................................................. 266
CHAPTER 11

ACCESS CONTROL ..................................................................................................268

11-1 PORTS CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................................... 268
11-2 RATE LIMITERS ......................................................................................................................................... 270
11-3 ACCESS CONTROL LIST ............................................................................................................................ 272
11-4 ACL STATUS ............................................................................................................................................ 284
CHAPTER 12

SNMP .......................................................................................................................286

12-1 CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................................................................... 286
12-2 SNMPV3 ............................................................................................................................................... 288
12-2.1 Communities................................................................................................................................ 288
vi12-2.2 Users ............................................................................................................................................. 290
12-2.3 Groups .......................................................................................................................................... 292
12-2.4 Views ............................................................................................................................................ 294
12-2.5 Access ........................................................................................................................................... 296
12-3 STATISTICS............................................................................................................................................... 298
12-3.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 298
12-3.2 Status ............................................................................................................................................ 299
12-4 HISTORY ................................................................................................................................................. 302
12-4.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 302
12-4.2 Status ............................................................................................................................................ 304
12-5 ALARM ................................................................................................................................................... 306
12-5.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 306
12-5.2 Status ............................................................................................................................................ 309
12-6 EVENT ..................................................................................................................................................... 311
12-6.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 311
12-6.2 Status ............................................................................................................................................ 313
CHAPTER 13

MEP ..........................................................................................................................315

13-1 MEP CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................................. 315
CHAPTER 14

ERPS .........................................................................................................................317

CHAPTER 15

PTP ...........................................................................................................................319

15-1 CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................................................................... 319
15-2 STATUS ................................................................................................................................................... 321
CHAPTER 16

EVENT NOTIFICATION ...........................................................................................323

16-1 SNMP TRAP ........................................................................................................................................... 323
16-2 EMAIL ..................................................................................................................................................... 326
16-3 LOG ........................................................................................................................................................ 328
16-3.1 Syslog............................................................................................................................................ 328
16-3.2 View Log ....................................................................................................................................... 330
16-4 DIGITAL I/O ............................................................................................................................................ 332
16-5 EVENT CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................................... 333
CHAPTER 17

DIAGNOSTICS .........................................................................................................335

17-1 PING ....................................................................................................................................................... 335
17-2 TRACEROUTE ........................................................................................................................................... 337
17-3 CABLE DIAGNOSTICS ................................................................................................................................ 339
17-4 MIRRORING ............................................................................................................................................ 341
17-5 SFLOW .................................................................................................................................................... 343
17-5.1 Configuration ............................................................................................................................... 343
17-5.2 Statistics ....................................................................................................................................... 346
CHAPTER 18

MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................................348

18-1 CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................................................................... 348
18-1.1 Save startup-config ..................................................................................................................... 348
18-1.2 Backup .......................................................................................................................................... 350
18-1.3 Restore .......................................................................................................................................... 351
18-1.4 Activate......................................................................................................................................... 353
18-1.5 Delete ........................................................................................................................................... 354
18-2 RESTART DEVICE ...................................................................................................................................... 355
18-3 FACTORY DEFAULTS.................................................................................................................................. 356
18-4 FIRMWARE .............................................................................................................................................. 357
18-4.1 Firmware Upgrade ...................................................................................................................... 357
18-4.2 Firmware Selection ...................................................................................................................... 358
vii

Revision History
Release
Initial Release

Date

Revision

2018/09/06
2019/6/13
2019/07/19

A1
A2
A3

viii

INTRODUCTION

Overview
In this User Guide, it will not only tell you how to install and connect your network system but
configure and monitor the DCGS-2828XB through the web by (RJ-45) serial interface and Ethernet
ports step-by-step. Many explanations in detail of hardware and software functions are shown as wellas the examples of the operation for web-based interface.
The DCGS-2828XB are the next generation Industrial L2+ managed GbE switch from
Manufacture, is a portfolio of affordable managed switches that provides a reliable infrastructure foryour business network. These switches deliver more intelligent features you need to improve theavailability of your critical business applications, protect your sensitive information, and optimize yournetwork bandwidth to deliver information and applications more effectively. It provides the ideal
combination of affordability and capabilities for entry level networking includes small business orenterprise application and helps you create a more efficient, better-connected workforce.
DCGS-2828XB L2+ Managed GbE Switch provide 28 ports in a single device; the specification ishighlighted as follows.
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫

L2+ features provide better manageability, security, QoS, and performance.
Support IPv4/IPv6 dual stack management
Support SSH/SSL secured management
Support SNMP v1/v2c/v3
Support RMON groups 1,2,3,9
Support sFlow
Support IGMP v1/v2/v3 Snooping
Support MLD v1/v2 Snooping
Support RADIUS and TACACS+ authentication
Support IP Source Guard
Support DHCP Relay (Option 82)
Support DHCP Snooping
Support ACL and QCL for traffic filtering
Support 802.1d(STP), 802.1w(RSTP) and 802.1s(MSTP)
Support LACP and static link aggregation
Support Q-in-Q double tag VLAN
Support GVRP dynamic VLAN

1Overview of this User Guide
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫
⚫

Chapter 1 “Operation of Web-based Management”
Chapter 2 “System”
Chapter 3 “Port Management”
Chapter 4 “VLAN Management”
Chapter 5 “Quality of Service”
Chapter 6 “Spanning tree”
Chapter 7 “MAC Address Tables”
Chapter 8 “Multicast”
Chapter 9 “DHCP”
Chapter 10 “Security”
Chapter 11 “Access Control”
Chapter 12 “SNMP”
Chapter 13 “MEP”
Chapter 14 “ERPS”
Chapter 15 “PTP”
Chapter 16 “Event Notification”
Chapter 17 “Diagnostics”
Chapter 18 “Maintenance”

Ordering information⚫

Variable N=282

Chapter 1

Operation of Web-based Management

InitialConfiguration

This chapter instructs you how to configure and manage the DCGS-2828XB throughthe web user interface. With this facility, you can easily access and monitor throughany one port of the switch all the status of the switch, including MIBs status, each port
activity, Spanning tree status, port aggregation status, multicast traffic, VLAN andpriority status, even illegal access record and so on.

The default values of the DCGS-2828XB are listed in the table below:
IP Address

192.168.1.1

Subnet Mask

255.255.255.0

Default Gateway

192.168.1.254

Usernameadmin

Password

After the DCGS-2828XB has been finished configuration it interface, you can browse it.
For instance, type http://192.168.1.1 in the address row in a browser, it will show thefollowing screen and ask you inputting username and password in order to login andaccess authentication.
The default username is “admin” and password is empty. For the first time to use,please enter the default username and password, and then click the <Login> button.
The login process now is completed. In this login menu, you have to input the complete
username and password respectively, the DCGS-2828XB will not give you a shortcut tousername automatically. This looks inconvenient, but safer.
In the DCGS-2828XB, allowed two or more users using administrator’s identity to
manage this switch, which administrator to do the last setting, it will be an available
configuration to effect the system.

NOTE:
When you login the Switch WEB page to manage. You must first type the
Username of the admin. Password was blank, so when you type after theend Username, please press enter. Management page to enter WEB.
When you login DCGS-2828XB series switch Web UI management, you can
use both ipv4 ipv6 login to manage

To optimize the display effect, we recommend you use Microsoft IE 6.0
above, Netscape V7.1 above or Firefox V1.00 above and have the resolution
1024x768. The switch supported neutral web browser interface

3

NOTE:AS GS-2828XB the function enable dhcp, so If you do not have DHCP server
to provide ip addresses to the switch, the Switch default ip 192.168.1.1

Figure 1: The login page4

Chapter 2

SystemThis chapter describes the entire basic configuration tasks which includes the System
Information and any manage of the Switch (e.g. Time, Account, IP, Syslog and NTP.)

2-1 System Information
You can identify the system by configuring system name, location and the contact of the switch.
The switch system’s contact information is provided here.

Web interface
To configure System Information in the web interface:
1.

Click System and System Information.

2.

Write System Name, Location, Contact information in this page.

3.

Click Apply

Figure 2-1: System Information

Parameter description:⚫

Model Name :Displays the factory defined model name for identification purpose.

⚫

System Description :Displays the system description.

⚫

Location :The system location configured in Configuration | System | Information | System Location.
5

⚫

Contact :The system contact configured in Configuration | System | Information | System Contact.

⚫

System name :Displays the user-defined system name that configured in System | System Information |Configuration | System Name.

⚫

System Date :The current (GMT) system time and date. The system time is obtained through the Timing
server running on the switch, if any.

⚫

System Uptime :The period of time the device has been operational.

⚫

Bootloader Version :Displays the current boot loader version number.

⚫

Firmware Version :The software version of this switch.

⚫

Hardware Version :Displays the hardware version of the device.

⚫

Mechanical Version :Displays the mechanical version of the device.

⚫

Series Number :The serial number of this switch.

⚫

MAC Address :The MAC Address of this switch.

⚫

Powers Status :Displays the powers status of the system.

⚫

Powers :Displays the powers of the system.

⚫

Temperature Status :Displays the temperature status of the system.

⚫

Temperature 1 :Displays the temperature 1 of the system.

⚫

Temperature 2 :Displays the temperature 2 of the system.

⚫

CPU Load (100ms, 1s, 10s) :Displays the cpu loading(100ms, 1s, 10s) of the system.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

⚫

Refresh :6

Click to refresh the page immediately.

Figure 2-1: The System Information buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs
every 3 seconds.

7

2-2 IP Address
2-2.1 Settings
The IPv4 address for the switch could be obtained via DHCP Server for VLAN 1. To manuallyconfigure an address, you need to change the switch's default settings to values that arecompatible with your network. You may also need to establish a default gateway between theswitch and management stations that exist on another network segment.
Configure the IP basic settings, control IP interfaces and IP routes.

Web Interface
To configure an IP Settings in the web interface:
1.

Click System, IP Address and Settings.

2.

Enable or Disable the IPv4 DHCP Client.

3.

Specify the IPv4 Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway.

4.

Select DNS Server.

5.

Click Apply

Figure 2-2.1: The IP settings

Parameter description:⚫

IPv4 DHCP Client Enable :Enable the DHCP client by checking this box. If this option is enabled, the system will
configure the IPv4 address and mask of the interface using the DHCP protocol. The DHCP
client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup.

⚫

IPv4 Address :The IPv4 address of the interface in dotted decimal notation.
If DHCP is enabled, this field is not used. The field may also be left blank if IPv4 operationon the interface is not desired.

⚫

Subnet Mask :The IPv4 network mask, in number of bits (prefix length). Valid values are between 0 and 30 bits for a
IPv4 address.
If DHCP is enabled, this field configures the fallback address network mask. The field may be left blank
if IPv4 operation on the interface is not desired - or no DHCP fallback address is desired.

8⚫

Gateway :The IP address of the IP gateway. Valid format is dotted decimal notationor a valid IPv6
notation. Gateway and Network must be of the same type.

⚫

DNS Server :This setting controls the DNS name resolution done by the switch.
There are four servers available for configuration, and the index of the server presents thepreference (less index has higher priority) in doing DNS name resolution.
The following modes are supported:No DNS server◼

No DNS server will be used.
Configured IPv4◼

Explicitly provide the valid IPv4 unicast address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal
notation.
Make sure the configured DNS server could be reachable (e.g. via PING) for activating
DNS service.
Configured IPv6◼

Explicitly provide the valid IPv6 unicast (except linklocal) address of the DNS Server.
Make sure the configured DNS server could be reachable (e.g. via PING6) for activating
DNS service.
From any DHCPv4 interfaces◼

The first DNS server offered from a DHCPv4 lease to a DHCPv4-enabled interface will be
used.
From this DHCPv4 interface◼

Specify from which DHCPv4-enabled interface a provided DNS server should be
preferred.
From any DHCPv6 interfaces◼

The first DNS server offered from a DHCPv6 lease to a DHCPv6-enabled interface will be
used.
From this DHCPv6 interface◼

Specify from which DHCPv6-enabled interface a provided DNS server should be
preferred.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

92-2.2 Advanced Settings
Configure the switch-managed IP information on this page
Configure IP basic settings, control IP interfaces and IP routes.
The maximum number of interfaces supported is 128 and the maximum number of routes is
128.

Web Interface
To configure an Advanced Settings in the web interface:
1.

Click System, IP Address and Advanced Settings.

2.

Click Add Interface then you can create new Interface on the switch.

3.

Click Add Route then you can create new Route on the switch.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 2-2.2: The advanced IP settings

Parameter description:
Basic Setting⚫

Mode :
Configure whether the IP stack should act as a Host or a Router. In Host mode, IP traffic
between interfaces will not be routed. In Router mode traffic is routed between all interfaces.

⚫

DNS Server :This setting controls the DNS name resolution done by the switch.
There are four servers available for configuration, and the index of the server presents thepreference (less index has higher priority) in doing DNS name resolution.
The following modes are supported:◼

No DNS server
No DNS server will be used.
10

Configured IPv4◼

Explicitly provide the valid IPv4 unicast address of the DNS Server in dotted decimal
notation.
Make sure the configured DNS server could be reachable (e.g. via PING) for activating
DNS service.
Configured IPv6◼

Explicitly provide the valid IPv6 unicast (except linklocal) address of the DNS Server.
Make sure the configured DNS server could be reachable (e.g. via PING6) for activating
DNS service.
From any DHCPv4 interfaces◼

The first DNS server offered from a DHCPv4 lease to a DHCPv4-enabled interface will be
used.
From this DHCPv4 interface◼

Specify from which DHCPv4-enabled interface a provided DNS server should be
preferred.
From any DHCPv6 interfaces◼

The first DNS server offered from a DHCPv6 lease to a DHCPv6-enabled interface will be
used.
From this DHCPv6 interface◼

Specify from which DHCPv6-enabled interface a provided DNS server should be
preferred.
⚫

DNS Proxy :When DNS proxy is enabled, system will relay DNS requests to the currently configured DNS
server, and reply as a DNS resolver to the client devices on the network.
Only IPv4 DNS proxy is now supported.
IP Interfaces⚫

Delete :Select this option to delete an existing IP interface.

⚫

VLAN :The VLAN associated with the IP interface. Only ports in this VLAN will be able to access the
IP interface. This field is only available for input when creating an new interface.

⚫

IPv4 DHCP Enabled :Enable the DHCP client by checking this box. If this option is enabled, the system will
configure the IPv4 address and mask of the interface using the DHCP protocol.

⚫

IPv4 DHCP Fallback Timeout :The number of seconds for trying to obtain a DHCP lease. After this period expires, aconfigured IPv4 address will be used as IPv4 interface address. A value of zero disables the
fallback mechanism, such that DHCP will keep retrying until a valid lease is obtained. Legalvalues are 0 to 4294967295 seconds.

⚫

IPv4 DHCP Current Lease :For DHCP interfaces with an active lease, this column show the current interface address, as
provided by the DHCP server.

⚫

IPv4 Address :The IPv4 address of the interface in dotted decimal notation.
11

If DHCP is enabled, this field is not used. The field may also be left blank if IPv4 operationon the interface is not desired.
⚫

IPv4 Mask Length :The IPv4 network mask, in number of bits (prefix length). Valid values are between 0 and
30 bits for a IPv4 address.
If DHCP is enabled, this field is not used. The field may also be left blank if IPv4 operationon the interface is not desired.

⚫

DHCPv6 Enable
Enable the DHCPv6 client by checking this box. If this option is enabled, the system will
configure the IPv6 address of the interface using the DHCPv6 protocol.

⚫

DHCPv6 Rapid Commit
Enable the DHCPv6 Rapid-Commit option by checking this box. If this option is enabled,
the DHCPv6 client terminates the waiting process as soon as a Reply message with a Rapid
Commit option is received.
This option is only manageable when DHCPv6 client is enabled.

⚫

DHCPv6 Current Lease
For DHCPv6 interface with an active lease, this column shows the interface addressprovided by the DHCPv6 server.

⚫

IPv6 Address :The IPv6 address of the interface. A IPv6 address is in 128-bit records represented as eight
fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field (:). For example,
fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7. The symbol :: is a special syntax that can be used as a shorthandway of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can appear only
once. It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example, ::192.1.2.34.
The field may be left blank if IPv6 operation on the interface is not desired.

⚫

IPv6 Mask Length :The IPv6 network mask, in number of bits (prefix length). Valid values are between 1 and128 bits for a IPv6 address.
The field may be left blank if IPv6 operation on the interface is not desired.
IP Routes⚫

Delete :Select this option to delete an existing IP route.

⚫

Network :The destination IP network or host address of this route. Valid format is dotted decimal
notation or a valid IPv6 notation. A default route can use the value 0.0.0.0 or IPv6 ::notation.

⚫

Mask Length :The destination IP network or host mask, in number of bits (prefix length). It defines how
much of a network address that must match, in order to qualify for this route. Valid values
are between 0 and 32 bits respectively 128 for IPv6 routes. Only a default route will have amask length of 0 (as it will match anything).

⚫

Gateway :The IP address of the IP gateway. Valid format is dotted decimal notation or a valid IPv6
notation. Gateway and Network must be of the same type.

⚫

Next Hop VLAN (Only for IPv6) :12

The VLAN ID (VID) of the specific IPv6 interface associated with the gateway.
The given VID ranges from 1 to 4094 and will be effective only when the corresponding
IPv6 interface is valid.
If the IPv6 gateway address is link-local, it must specify the next hop VLAN for the gateway.
If the IPv6 gateway address is not link-local, system ignores the next hop VLAN for the
gateway.
Buttons⚫

Add Interface :Click to add a new IP interface. A maximum of 128 interfaces is supported.

⚫

Add Route :Click to add a new IP route. A maximum of 128 routes is supported.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

132-2.3 Status
2-2.3.1 IP Status
This page displays the status of the IP protocol layer. The status is defined by the IP
interfaces, the IP routes and the neighbour cache (ARP cache) status.

Web Interface
To display the log configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click System, IP Address, Status and IP Status.

2.

Display the IP Configuration information.

Figure 2-2.3.1: The IP Status

Parameter description:
IP Interfaces⚫

Interface :Show the name of the interface.

⚫

Type :Show the address type of the entry. This may be LINK or IPv4.

⚫

Address :Show the current address of the interface (of the given type).

⚫

Status :Show the status flags of the interface (and/or address).
IP Routes⚫

Network :Show the destination IP network or host address of this route.

⚫

Gateway :Show the gateway address of this route.

⚫

Status :Show the status flags of the route.
14

Neighbour cache⚫

IP Address :Show the IP address of the entry.

⚫

Link Address :Show the Link (MAC) address for which a binding to the IP address given exist.
Buttons

Figure 2-2.3.1: The IP Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

15

2-2.3.2 Routing Info Base
Each page shows up to 999 table entries, selected through the "entries per page" input field.
When first visited, the web page will show the beginning entries of this table.

Web Interface
To display the log configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click System, IP Addres, Status and Routing Info Base.

2.

Display the Routing Info Base information.

Figure 2-2.3.2: The Routing Information BaseParameter description:⚫

Start from ID :Input field allow the user to change the starting point in this table.

⚫

Protocol :The protocol of the route.
DHCP: The route is created by DHCP.
Connected: The destination network is connected directly.
Static: The route is created by user.
OSPF: The route is created by OSPF.

⚫

Network/Prefix
Network and prefix (example 10.0.0.0/16) of the given route entry.

⚫

NextHopThe IP address of nexthop. Value '0.0.0.0' indicates the link is directly connected.

⚫

Distance
The distance of the route.

⚫

MetricThe metric of the route.

⚫

Interface
The interface where the ip packet is outgoing.

⚫

Uptime (hh:ss:mm)
16

The time till the route is created. The unit is second.
⚫

State
Indicate if the destination network is reachable or not.

Buttons

Figure 2-2.3.1: The IP Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

First Page :Updates the system log entries, turn to the first page.

⚫

Next Page :Updates the system log entries, turn to the next page.

⚫

First Entry :Updates the table starting from the first entry in the IPMC Profile Address Configuration.

⚫

Next Entry :Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

172-3 System Time
The switch provides manual and automatic ways to set the system time via NTP. Manual
setting is simple and you just input “Year”, “Month”, “Day”, “Hour” and “Minute” within thevalid value range indicated in each item.

Web Interface
To configure Time in the web interface:
1.

Click System and System Time

2.

Specify the Time parameter.

3.

Click Apply.

Figure 2-3: The time configuration

Parameter description:
Time Configuration⚫

Clock Source :There are two modes for configuring how the Clock Source from. Select "Local Settings" :Clock Source from Local Time. Select "NTP Server" : Clock Source from NTP Server.

⚫

System Date :Show the current time of the system. The year of system date limits between 2011 and 2037.
Time Zone Configuration⚫

Time Zone :18

Lists various Time Zones worldwide. Select appropriate Time Zone from the drop down andclick Apply to set.
⚫

Acronym :User can set the acronym of the time zone. This is a User configurable acronym to identify
the time zone. (Range: Up to 16 characters)
Daylight Saving Time Configuration⚫

Daylight Saving Time :This is used to set the clock forward or backward according to the configurations set below
for a defined Daylight Saving Time duration. Select 'Disable' to disable the Daylight Saving
Time configuration. Select 'Recurring' and configure the Daylight Saving Time duration torepeat the configuration every year. Select 'Non-Recurring' and configure the Daylight
Saving Time duration for single time configuration. (Default: Disabled).

⚫

Start time settings :Week - Select the starting week number.
Day - Select the starting day.
Month - Select the starting month.
Hours - Select the starting hour.
Minutes - Select the starting minute.

⚫

End time settings :Week - Select the ending week number.
Day - Select the ending day.
Month - Select the ending month.
Hours - Select the ending hour.
Minutes - Select the starting minute.

⚫

Offset settings :Offset - Enter the number of minutes to add during Daylight Saving Time. (Range: 1 to1440)
NOTE: The under “Start Time Settings” and “End Time Settings” wasdisplayed what you set on the “Start Time Settings” and “End Time
Settings” field information.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Figure 2-3: The Configure NTP Server button⚫

Configure NTP Server :Click to configure NTP server, When Clock Source select from NTP Server.
19

Figure 2-3: The SNTP configuration

NTP is Network Time Protocol and is used to sync the network time based Greenwich MeanTime (GMT). If use the NTP mode and select a built-in NTP time server or manually specify anuser-defined NTP server as well as Time Zone, the switch will sync the time in a short afterpressing <Apply> button. Though it synchronizes the time automatically, NTP does not update
the time periodically without user’s processing.
Time Zone is an offset time of GMT. You have to select the time zone first and then performtime sync via NTP because the switch will combine this time zone offset and updated NTP time
to come out the local time, otherwise, you will not able to get the correct time. The switch
supports configurable time zone from –12 to +13 step 1 hour.
Default Time zone: +8 Hrs.

Parameter description :⚫

Server 1 to 5 :Provide the NTP IPv4 or IPv6 address of this switch. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records
represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field(:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special syntax that can be used
as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can
only appear once. It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example, '::192.1.2.34'.
Buttons
These buttons are displayed on the SNTP page:⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

202-4 LLDPThe switch supports the LLDP. For current information on your switch model, The Link Layer
Discovery Protocol (LLDP) provides a standards-based method for enabling switches toadvertise themselves to adjacent devices and to learn about adjacent LLDP devices. The Link
Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is a vendor-neutral Link Layer protocol in the Internet Protocol
Suite used by network devices for advertising their identity, capabilities, and neighbors on aIEEE 802 local area network, principally wired Ethernet. The protocol is formally referred to by
the IEEE as Station and Media Access Control Connectivity Discovery specified in standards
document IEEE 802.1AB.

2-4.1 LLDP Configuration
You can per port to do the LLDP configuration and the detail parameters, the settings will takeeffect immediately. This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP portsettings.

Web Interface
To configure LLDP:
1.

Click System, LLDP and LLDP configuration.

2.

Modify LLDP timing parameters.

3.

Set the required mode for transmitting or receiving LLDP messages.

4.

Specify the information to include in the TLV field of advertised messages.

5.

Click Apply.

Figure 2-4.1: The LLDP Configuration

Parameter description:

LLDP Parameters⚫

Tx Interval :21

The switch periodically transmits LLDP frames to its neighbours for having the network
discovery information up-to-date. The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by
the Tx Interval value. Valid values are restricted to 5 - 32768 seconds.
⚫

Tx Hold :Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame
shall be considered valid. The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by
Tx Interval seconds. Valid values are restricted to 2 - 10 times.

⚫

Tx Delay :If some configuration is changed (e.g. the IP address) a new LLDP frame is transmitted, but
the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least the value of Tx Delay seconds. Tx
Delay cannot be larger than 1/4 of the Tx Interval value. Valid values are restricted to 1 - 8192
seconds.

⚫

Tx Reinit :When a port is disabled, LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted, an LLDP shutdown frame
is transmitted to the neighboring units, signaling that the LLDP information isn't valid
anymore. Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new
LLDP initialization. Valid values are restricted to 1 - 10 seconds.

LLDP Port Configuration
The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected, as reflected by the page header.
⚫

Port :The switch port number of the logical LLDP port.

⚫

Mode :
Select LLDP mode.
Rx only : The switch will not send out LLDP information, but LLDP information from neighborunits is analyzed.
Tx only : The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors, but will send out
LLDP information.
Disabled : The switch will not send out LLDP information, and will drop LLDP information
received from neighbors.
Enabled : the switch will send out LLDP information, and will analyze LLDP information
received from neighbors.

⚫

CDP Aware :Select CDP awareness.
The CDP operation is restricted to decode incoming CDP frames (The switch doesn't transmit
CDP frames). CDP frames are only decoded if LLDP on the port is enabled.
Only CDP TLVs that can be mapped to a corresponding field in the LLDP neighbors’ table are
decoded. All other TLVs are discarded (Unrecognized CDP TLVs and discarded CDP frames
are not shown in the LLDP statistics.). CDP TLVs are mapped onto LLDP neighbors’ table asshown below.
CDP TLV "Device ID" is mapped to the LLDP "Chassis ID" field.
CDP TLV "Address" is mapped to the LLDP "Management Address" field. The CDP address
TLV can contain multiple addresses, but only the first address is shown in the LLDP neighbors’table.
CDP TLV "Port ID" is mapped to the LLDP "Port ID" field.
22

CDP TLV "Version and Platform" is mapped to the LLDP "System Description" field.
Both the CDP and LLDP support "system capabilities", but the CDP capabilities covercapabilities that are not part of the LLDP. These capabilities are shown as "others" in the LLDP
neighbors’ table.
If all ports have CDP awareness disabled the switch forwards CDP frames received fromneighbor devices. If at least one port has CDP awareness enabled all CDP frames are
terminated by the switch.
NOTE: When CDP awareness on a port is disabled the CDP
information isn't removed immediately, but gets when the hold timeis exceeded.
⚫

Trap :LLDP trapping notifies events such as newly-detectedneighboring devices and linkmalfunctions.

⚫

Port Descr :Optional TLV: When checked the "port description" is included in LLDP informationtransmitted.

⚫

Sys Name :Optional TLV: When checked the "system name" is included in LLDP information transmitted.

⚫

Sys Descr :Optional TLV: When checked the "system description" is included in LLDP informationtransmitted.

⚫

Sys Capa :Optional TLV: When checked the "system capability" is included in LLDP informationtransmitted.

⚫

Mgmt Addr :Optional TLV: When checked the "management address" is included in LLDP informationtransmitted.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

23

2-4.2 LLDP-MED Configuration
Media Endpoint Discovery is an enhancement of LLDP, known as LLDP-MED that provides thefollowing facilities:
Auto-discovery of LAN policies (such as VLAN, Layer 2 Priority and Differentiated services(Diffserv) settings) enabling plug and play networking.
Device location discovery to allow creation of location databases and, in the case of Voice over
Internet Protocol (VoIP), Enhanced 911 services.
Inventory management, allowing network administrators to track their network devices, anddetermine their characteristics (manufacturer, software and hardware versions, and serial orasset number).
This page allows you to configure the LLDP-MED. This function applies to VoIP devices which
support LLDP-MED.

Web Interface
To configure LLDP-MED:
1.

Click System, LLDP and LLDP-MED Configuration.

2.

Modify Fast start repeat count parameter, default is 4.

3.

Modify Transmit TLVs parameters.

4.

Modify Coordinates Location parameters.

5.

Fill Civic Address Location parameters.

6.

Fill Emergency Call Service parameters.

7.

Add new policy.

8.

Click Apply, will show following Policy Port Configuration.

9.

Select Policy ID for each port.

10.

Click Apply.

24

Figure 2-4.2: The LLDP-MED Configuration

Parameter description :Fast start repeat count
Rapid startup and Emergency Call Service Location Identification Discovery of endpoints is a
critically important aspect of VoIP systems in general. In addition, it is best to advertise only
those pieces of information which are specifically relevant to particular endpoint types (forexample only advertise the voice network policy to permitted voice-capable devices), both inorder to conserve the limited LLDPU space and to reduce security and system integrity issues
that can come with inappropriate knowledge of the network policy.
With this in mind LLDP-MED defines an LLDP-MED Fast Start interaction between the protocol
and the application layers on top of the protocol, in order to achieve these related properties.
Initially, a Network Connectivity Device will only transmit LLDP TLVs in an LLDPDU. Only after
an LLDP-MED Endpoint Device is detected, will an LLDP-MED capable Network Connectivity
25

Device start to advertise LLDP-MED TLVs in outgoing LLDPDUs on the associated port. The
LLDP-MED application will temporarily speed up the transmission of the LLDPDU to start withina second, when a new LLDP-MED neighbour has been detected in order share LLDP-MED
information as fast as possible to new neighbours.
Because there is a risk of an LLDP frame being lost during transmission between neighbours, it
is recommended to repeat the fast start transmission multiple times to increase the possibilityof the neighbours receiving the LLDP frame. With Fast start repeat count it is possible to specify
the number of times the fast start transmission would be repeated. The recommended value is
4 times, given that 4 LLDP frames with a 1 second interval will be transmitted, when an LLDP
frame with new information is received.
It should be noted that LLDP-MED and the LLDP-MED Fast Start mechanism is only intended to
run on links between LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoint Devices, and assuch does not apply to links between LAN infrastructure elements, including Network
Connectivity Devices, or other types of links.

Transmit TLVs⚫

Port :The interface name to which the configuration applies.

⚫

Capabilities :When checked the switch's capabilities is included in LLDP-MEDinformation transmitted.

⚫

Policies :When checked the configured policies for the interface is included in LLDPMED information transmitted.

⚫

Location :When checked the configured location information for the switch is included in LLDPMED information transmitted.

⚫

Device Type :Any LLDP-MED Device is operating as a specific type of LLDP-MED Device, which may beeither a Network Connectivity Device or a specific Class of Endpoint Device, as defined below.
A Network Connectivity Device is a LLDP-MED Device that provides access to the IEEE 802
based LAN infrastructure for LLDP-MED Endpoint Devices
An LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of thefollowing technologies :1. LAN Switch/Router
2. IEEE 802.1 Bridge
3. IEEE 802.3 Repeater (included for historical reasons)
4. IEEE 802.11 Wireless Access Point
5. Any device that supports the IEEE 802.1AB and MED extensions that can relay IEEE 802
frames via any method.
An Endpoint Device a LLDP-MED Device that sits at the network edge and provides some
aspect of IP communications service, based on IEEE 802 LAN technology.
The main difference between a Network Connectivity Device and an Endpoint Device is that
only an Endpoint Device can start the LLDP-MED information exchange.
Even though a switch always should be a Network ConnectivityDevice, it is possible toconfigure it to act as an Endpoint Device, and thereby start the LLDP-MED information
26

exchange (In the case where two Network Connectivity Devices are connected together)

Coordinates Location⚫

Latitude :Latitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0-90 degrees with a maximum of 4 digits.
It is possible to specify the direction to either North of the equator or South of the equator.

⚫

Longitude :Longitude SHOULD be normalized to within 0-180 degrees with a maximum of 5 digits.
It is possible to specify the direction to either East of the prime meridian or West of the prime
meridian.

⚫

Altitude :Altitude SHOULD be normalized to within -32767 to 32767 with a maximum of 4 digits.
It is possible to select between two altitude types (floors or meters).
Meters: Representing meters of Altitude defined by the vertical datum specified.
Floors: Representing altitude in a form more relevant in buildings which have different floorto-floor dimensions. An altitude = 0.0 is meaningful even outside a building, and represents
ground level at the given latitude and longitude. Inside a building, 0.0 represents the floor
level associated with ground level at the main entrance.

⚫

Map Datum :The Map Datum is used for the coordinates given in these options:
WGS84: (Geographical 3D) - World Geodesic System 1984, CRS Code 4327, and Prime
Meridian Name: Greenwich.
NAD83/NAVD88: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian Name:
Greenwich; the associated vertical datum is the North American Vertical Datum of 1988
(NAVD88). This datum pair is to be used when referencing locations on land, not near tidal
water (which would use Datum = NAD83/MLLW).
NAD83/MLLW: North American Datum 1983, CRS Code 4269, Prime Meridian Name:
Greenwich; the associated vertical datum is Mean Lower Low Water (MLLW). This datum pair
is to be used when referencing locations on water/sea/ocean.

Civic Address Location
IETF Geopriv Civic Address based Location Configuration Information (Civic Address LCI).
⚫

Country code :The two-letter ISO 3166 country code in capital ASCII letters - Example: DK, DE or US.

⚫

State/Province :National subdivisions (state, canton, region, province, prefecture).

⚫

County :County, parish, gun (Japan), district.

⚫

City :
City, township, shi (Japan) - Example: Copenhagen.

⚫

City district :City division, borough, city district, ward, chou (Japan).

⚫

Block (Neighbourhood) :27

Neighbourhood, block.
⚫

Street :Street - Example: Poppelvej.

⚫

Leading street direction :Leading street direction - Example: N.

⚫

Trailing street suffix :Trailing street suffix - Example: SW.

⚫

Street suffix :Street suffix - Example: Ave, Platz.

⚫

House no. :House number - Example: 21.

⚫

House no. suffix :House number suffix - Example: A, 1/2.

⚫

Landmark :Landmark or vanity address - Example: Columbia University.

⚫

Additional location info :Additional location info - Example: South Wing.

⚫

Name :Name (residence and office occupant) - Example: Flemming Jahn.

⚫

Zip code :Postal/zip code - Example: 2791.

⚫

Building :Building (structure) - Example: Low Library.

⚫

Apartment :Unit (Apartment, suite) - Example: Apt 42.

⚫

Floor :
Floor - Example: 4.

⚫

Room no. :Room number - Example: 450F.

⚫

Place type :Place type - Example: Office.

⚫

Postal community name :Postal community name - Example: Leonia.

⚫

P.O. Box :Post office box (P.O. BOX) - Example: 12345.

⚫

Additional code :Additional code - Example: 1320300003.
Emergency Call Service:28

Emergency Call Service (e.g. E911 and others), such as defined by TIA or NENA.
⚫

Emergency Call Service :Emergency Call Service ELIN identifier data format is defined to carry the ELIN identifier as
used during emergency call setup to a traditional CAMA or ISDN trunk-based PSAP. This
format consists of a numerical digit string, corresponding to the ELIN to be used for
emergency calling.

Policies
Network Policy Discovery enables the efficient discovery and diagnosis of mismatch issues with
the VLAN configuration, along with the associated Layer 2 and Layer 3 attributes, which apply
for a set of specific protocol applications on that port. Improper network policy configurations
are a very significant issue in VoIP environments that frequently result in voice quality
degradation or loss of service.
Policies are only intended for use with applications that have specific 'real-time' network policy
requirements, such as interactive voice and/or video services.
The network policy attributes advertised are:
1. Layer 2 VLAN ID (IEEE 802.1Q-2003)
2. Layer 2 priority value (IEEE 802.1D-2004)
3. Layer 3 Diffserv code point (DSCP) value (IETF RFC 2474)
This network policy is potentially advertised and associated with multiple sets of application
types supported on a given port. The application types specifically addressed are:
1. Voice
2. Guest Voice
3. Softphone Voice
4. Video Conferencing
5. Streaming Video
6. Control / Signalling (conditionally support a separate network policy for the media types
above)
A large network may support multiple VoIP policies across the entire organization, and different
policies per application type. LLDP-MED allows multiple policies to be advertised per port, eachcorresponding to a different application type. Different ports on the same Network Connectivity
Device may advertise different sets of policies, based on the authenticated user identity or port
configuration.
It should be noted that LLDP-MED is not intended to run on links other than between
Network Connectivity Devices and Endpoints, and therefore does not need to advertise themultitude of network policies that frequently run on an aggregated link interior to the LAN.
⚫

Delete :Check to delete the policy. It will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

Policy ID :ID for the policy. This is auto generated and shall be used when selecting the polices thatshall be mapped to the specific ports.

⚫

Application Type :Intended use of the application types:29

1. Voice - for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supportinginteractive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for easeof deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications.
2. Voice Signalling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a different policy
for the voice signalling than for the voice media. This application type should not be
advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Voice application
policy.
3. Guest Voice - support a separate 'limited feature-set' voice service for guest users andvisitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supportinginteractive voice services.
4. Guest Voice Signalling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a different
policy for the guest voice signalling than for the guest voice media. This application typeshould not be advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the
Guest Voice application policy.
5. Softphone Voice - for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices, suchas PCs or laptops. This class of endpoints frequently does not support multiple VLANs, if atall, and are typically configured to use an 'untagged' VLAN or a single 'tagged' data specific
VLAN. When a network policy is defined for use with an 'untagged' VLAN (see Tagged flag
below), then the L2 priority field is ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance.
6. Video Conferencing - for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and othersimilar appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.
7. Streaming Video - for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution andother similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network
policy treatment. Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended
use of this application type.
8. Video Signalling (conditional) - for use in network topologies that require a separate policy
for the video signalling than for the video media. This application type should not be
advertised if all the same network policies apply as those advertised in the Video
Conferencing application policy.
⚫

Tag :Tag indicating whether the specified application type is using a 'tagged' or an 'untagged'
VLAN.
Untagged indicates that the device is using an untagged frame format and as such does notinclude a tag header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003. In this case, both the VLAN ID and theLayer 2 priority fields are ignored and only the DSCP value has relevance.
Tagged indicates that the device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format, and that boththe VLAN ID and the Layer 2 priority values are being used, as well as the DSCP value. The
tagged format includes an additional field, known as the tag header. The tagged frame
format also includes priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.

⚫

VLAN ID :VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003.

⚫

L2 Priority :L2 Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type. L2 Priority may
specify one of eight priority levels (0 through 7), as defined by IEEE 802.1D-2004. A value of
0 represents use of the default priority as defined in IEEE 802.1D-2004.

⚫

DSCP :DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behaviour for the specified application typeas defined in IETF RFC 2474. DSCP may contain one of 64 code point values (0 through 63).
30

A value of 0 represents use of the default DSCP value as defined in RFC 2475.
Buttons⚫

Adding New Policy :Click to add a new policy. Specify the Application type, Tag, VLAN ID, L2 Priority and DSCP
for the new policy. Click "Apply".

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

31

2-4.3 LLDP Neighbour
This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbours. The displayed table contains a
row for each port on which an LLDP neighbour is detected. The columns hold the following
information:

Web Interface
To show LLDP neighbours:
1.

Click System, LLDP and LLDP Neighbour.

2.

Click Refresh for manual update web screen.

3.

Click Auto-refresh for auto-update web screen.

Figure 2-4.3: The LLDP Neighbour information

NOTE: If there is no device that supports LLDP in your network
then the table will show “No LLDP neighbour information found”.

Parameter description:⚫

Local Port :The port on which the LLDP frame was received.

⚫

Chassis ID :The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbour's LLDP frames.

⚫

Port ID :The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbour port.

⚫

Port Description :Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbour unit.

⚫

System Name :System Name is the name advertised by the neighbour unit.

⚫

System Capabilities :System Capabilities describes the neighbour unit's capabilities. The possible capabilities are:
1. Other
2. Repeater
3. Bridge
4. WLAN Access Point
5. Router32

6. Telephone
7. DOCSIS cable device
8. Station only
9. Reserved
When a capability is enabled, the capability is followed by (+). If the capability is disabled,
the capability is followed by (-).
⚫

System Description
Displays the system description.

⚫

Management Address :Management Address is the neighbour unit's address that is used for higher layer entities toassist discovery by the network management. This could for instance hold the neighbour's
IP address.
Buttons

Figure 2-4.3: The LLDP Neighbor buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

33

2-4.4 LLDP-MED Neighbour
This page provides a status overview of all LLDP-MED neighbours. The displayed table contains
a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbour is detected. This function applies to VoIP
devices which support LLDP-MED. The columns hold the following information:

Web Interface
To show LLDP-MED neighbor:
1.

Click System, LLDP and LLDP-MED Neighbour.

2.

Click Refresh for manual update web screen.

3.

Click Auto-refresh for auto-update web screen.

Figure 2-4.4: The LLDP-MED Neighbour information

NOTE: If there is no device that supports LLDP-MED in yournetwork then the table will show “No LLDP-MED neighbour
information found”.

Parameter description⚫

Port :The port on which the LLDP frame was received.

⚫

Device Type :LLDP-MED Devices are comprised of two primary Device Types: Network Connectivity
Devices and Endpoint Devices.
◼

LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Device Definition

LLDP-MED Network Connectivity Devices, as defined in TIA-1057, provide access to the IEEE
802 based LAN infrastructure for LLDP-MED Endpoint Devices. An LLDP-MED Network
Connectivity Device is a LAN access device based on any of the following technologies:
1. LAN Switch/Router
2. IEEE 802.1 Bridge
3. IEEE 802.3 Repeater (included for historical reasons)
4. IEEE 802.11 Wireless Access Point
5. Any device that supports the IEEE 802.1AB and MED extensions defined by TIA-1057 andcan relay IEEE 802 frames via any method.
◼

LLDP-MED Endpoint Device Definition :LLDP-MED Endpoint Devices, as defined in TIA-1057, are located at the IEEE 802 LAN networkedge, and participate in IP communication service using the LLDP-MED framework.
Within the LLDP-MED Endpoint Device category, the LLDP-MED scheme is broken into
34

further Endpoint Device Classes, as defined in the following.
Each LLDP-MED Endpoint Device Class is defined to build upon the capabilities defined forthe previous Endpoint Device Class. For-example will any LLDP-MED Endpoint Device
claiming compliance as a Media Endpoint (Class II) also support all aspects of TIA-1057
applicable to Generic Endpoints (Class I), and any LLDP-MED Endpoint Device claiming
compliance as a Communication Device (Class III) will also support all aspects of TIA-1057
applicable to both Media Endpoints (Class II) and Generic Endpoints (Class I).
◼

LLDP-MED Generic Endpoint (Class I) :The LLDP-MED Generic Endpoint (Class I) definition is applicable to all endpoint productsthat require the base LLDP discovery services defined in TIA-1057, however do not support
IP media or act as an end-user communication appliance. Such devices may include (but are
not limited to) IP Communication Controllers, other communication related servers, or any
device requiring basic services as defined in TIA-1057.
Discovery services defined in this class include LAN configuration, device location, network
policy, power management, and inventory management.
◼

LLDP-MED Media Endpoint (Class II) :The LLDP-MED Media Endpoint (Class II) definition is applicable to all endpoint products thathave IP media capabilities however may or may not be associated with a particular end user.
Capabilities include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint Class(Class I), and are extended to include aspects related to media streaming. Example productcategories expected to adhere to this class include (but are not limited to) Voice / Media
Gateways, Conference Bridges, Media Servers, and similar.
Discovery services defined in this class include media-type-specific network layer policy
discovery.
◼

LLDP-MED Communication Endpoint (Class III) :The LLDP-MED Communication Endpoint (Class III) definition is applicable to all endpoint
products that act as end user communication appliances supporting IP media. Capabilities
include all of the capabilities defined for the previous Generic Endpoint (Class I) and Media
Endpoint (Class II) classes, and are extended to include aspects related to end user devices.
Example product categories expected to adhere to this class include (but are not limited to)end user communication appliances, such as IP Phones, PC-based softphones, or othercommunication appliances that directly support the end user.
Discovery services defined in this class include provision of location identifier (including ECS/ E911 information), embedded L2 switch support, inventory management.
⚫

LLDP-MED Capabilities :LLDP-MED Capabilities describes the neighborhood unit's LLDP-MED capabilities. The
possible capabilities are:
1. LLDP-MED capabilities
2. Network Policy
3. Location Identification
4. Extended Power via MDI - PSE
5. Extended Power via MDI - PD
6. Inventory
7. Reserved⚫

Application Type :Application Type indicating the primary function of the application(s) defined for this network35

policy, advertised by an Endpoint or Network Connectivity Device. The possible application
types are shown below.
1. Voice - for use by dedicated IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supportinginteractive voice services. These devices are typically deployed on a separate VLAN for easeof deployment and enhanced security by isolation from data applications.
2. Voice Signalling - for use in network topologies that require a different policy for the voice
signalling than for the voice media.
3. Guest Voice - to support a separate limited feature-set voice service for guest users andvisitors with their own IP Telephony handsets and other similar appliances supportinginteractive voice services.
4. Guest Voice Signalling - for use in network topologies that require a different policy forthe guest voice signalling than for the guest voice media.
5. Softphone Voice - for use by softphone applications on typical data centric devices, suchas PCs or laptops.
6. Video Conferencing - for use by dedicated Video Conferencing equipment and othersimilar appliances supporting real-time interactive video/audio services.
7. Streaming Video - for use by broadcast or multicast based video content distribution andother similar applications supporting streaming video services that require specific network
policy treatment. Video applications relying on TCP with buffering would not be an intended
use of this application type.
8. Video Signalling - for use in network topologies that require a separate policy for the video
signalling than for the video media.
⚫

Policy :Policy indicates that an Endpoint Device wants to explicitly advertise that the policy isrequired by the device. Can be either Defined or Unknown
Unknown: The network policy for the specified application type is currently unknown.
Defined: The network policy is defined.

⚫

TAG :
TAG is indicative of whether the specified application type is using a tagged or an untagged
VLAN. Can be Tagged or Untagged.
Untagged: The device is using an untagged frame format and as such does not include a tag
header as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003.
Tagged: The device is using the IEEE 802.1Q tagged frame format.

⚫

VLAN ID :VLAN ID is the VLAN identifier (VID) for the port as defined in IEEE 802.1Q-2003. A value of
1 through 4094 is used to define a valid VLAN ID. A value of 0 (Priority Tagged) is used if thedevice is using priority tagged frames as defined by IEEE 802.1Q-2003, meaning that only
the IEEE 802.1D priority level is significant and the default PVID of the ingress port is usedinstead.

⚫

Priority :Priority is the Layer 2 priority to be used for the specified application type.One of the eightpriority levels (0 through 7).

⚫

DSCP :DSCP is the DSCP value to be used to provide Diffserv node behavior for the specified
application type as defined in IETF RFC 2474. Contain one of 64 code point values (0 through
36

63).
⚫

Auto-negotiation
Auto-negotiation identifies if MAC/PHY auto-negotiation is supported by the link partner.

⚫

Auto-negotiation status
Auto-negotiation status identifies if auto-negotiation is currently enabled at the link
partner. If Auto-negotiation is supported and Auto-negotiation status is disabled, the802.3 PMD operating mode will be determined the operational MAU type field value rather
than by auto-negotiation.

⚫

Auto-negotiation Capabilities
Auto-negotiation Capabilities shows the link partners MAC/PHY capabilities.
Buttons

Figure 2-4.4: The LLDP Neighbor buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

37

2-4.5 LLDP Neighbour EEE
By using EEE power savings can be achieved at the expense of traffic latency. This latency occurs
due to that the circuits EEE turn off to save power, need time to boot up before sending traffic
over the link. This time is called "wakeup time". To achieve minimal latency, devices canuse LLDP to exchange information about their respective tx and rx "wakeup time ", as a way toagree upon the minimum wakeup time they need.
This page provides an overview of EEE information exchanged by LLDP.

Web Interface
To show LLDP neighbor EEE:
1.

Click System, LLDP and LLDP Neighbour EEE.

2.

Click Refresh for manual update web screen.

3.

Click Auto-refresh for auto-update web screen.

Figure 2-4.5: The LLDP Neighbour EEE information

Parameter description⚫

Local Port :The interface at which LLDP frames are received or transmitted.

⚫

Tx Tw :The link partner's maximum time that transmit path can hold-off sending data after
deassertion of LPI.

⚫

Rx Tw :The link partner's time that receiver would like the transmitter to hold-off to allow time forthe receiver to wake from sleep.

⚫

Fallback Receive Tw :The link partner's fallback receive Tw.
A receiving link partner may inform the transmitter of an alternate desired Tw_sys_tx. Since a
receiving link partner is likely to have discrete levels for savings, this provides the transmitterwith additional information that it may use for a more efficient allocation. Systems that do
not implement this option default the value to be the same as that of the Receive Tw_sys_tx.

⚫

Echo Tx Tw :The link partner's Echo Tx Tw value.
The respective echo values shall be defined as the local link partners reflection (echo) of theremote link partners respective values. When a local link partner receives its echoed values
from the remote link partner it can determine whether or not the remote link partner hasreceived, registered and processed its most recent values. For example, if the local link38

partner receives echoed parameters that do not match the values in its local MIB, then thelocal link partner infers that the remote link partners request was based on stale information.
⚫

Echo Rx Tw :The link partner's Echo Rx Tw value.

⚫

Resolved Tx Tw :The resolved Tx Tw for this link. Note : NOT the link partner
The resolved value that is the actual "tx wakeup time " used for this link (basedon EEE information exchanged via LLDP).

⚫

Resolved Rx Tw :The resolved Rx Tw for this link. Note : NOT the link partner
The resolved value that is the actual "tx wakeup time " used for this link (basedon EEE information exchanged via LLDP).

⚫

EEE in Sync :Shows whether the switch and the link partner have agreed on wake times.
Red - Switch and link partner have not agreed on wakeup times.
Green - Switch and link partner have agreed on wakeup times.
Buttons

Figure 2-4.6: The LLDP Neighbor EEE buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

39

2-4.6 LLDP Statistics
Two types of counters are shown. Global counters are counters that refer to the whole switch,while local counters refer to per port counters for the currently selected switch.

Web Interface
To show LLDP Statistics:
1.

Click System ,LLDP and LLDP Statistics.

2.

Click Refresh for manual update web screen.

3.

Click Auto-refresh for auto-update web screen.

4.

Click Clear to clear all counters.

Figure 2-4.6: The LLDP Statistics information

Parameter description:

Global Counters⚫

Neighbour entries were last changed at :It also shows the time when the last entry was last deleted or added. It also shows the time
elapsed since the last change was detected.

⚫

Total Neighbours Entries Added :Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot.

⚫

Total Neighbours Entries Deleted :Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot.

⚫

Total Neighbours Entries Dropped :Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to the entry table being full.

⚫

Total Neighbours Entries Aged Out :Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time-To-Live expiring.

Local Counters
40

The displayed table contains a row for each port. The columns hold the following information:⚫

Local Port :The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted.

⚫

Tx Frames :The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port.

⚫

Rx Frames :The number of LLDP frames received on the port.

⚫

Rx Errors :The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error.

⚫

Frames Discarded :If an LLDP frame is received on a port, and the switch's internal table has run full, the LLDP
frame is counted and discarded. This situation is known as "Too Many Neighbours" in the
LLDP standard. LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote
Port ID is not already contained within the table. Entries are removed from the table when agiven port's link is down, an LLDP shutdown frame is received, or when the entry ages out.

⚫

TLVs Discarded :Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information, known as TLVs (TLV is short for"Type Length Value"). If a TLV is malformed, it is counted and discarded.

⚫

TLVs Unrecognized :The number of well-formed TLVs, but with an unknown type value.

⚫

Org. Discarded :The number of organizationally received TLVs.

⚫

Age-Outs :Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid(age-out time). If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time, the LLDP
information is removed, and the Age-Out counter is incremented.
Buttons

Figure 2-4.7: The LLDP Statistics information buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page.

⚫

Clear :
Clears the counters for the selected port.

41

2-5 UPnP
UPnP is an acronym for Universal Plug and Play. The goals of UPnP are to allow devices toconnect seamlessly and to simplify the implementation of networks in the home (data sharing,
communications, and entertainment) and in corporate environments for simplified installationof computer components

Web Interface
To configure the UPnP Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click System and UPnP

2.

Scroll to select the mode to enable or disable

3.

Specify the parameters in each blank field.

4.

Click the Apply to save the setting

5.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values

Figure 2-5: The UPnP Configuration

Parameter description:
These parameters are displayed on the UPnP Configuration page:⚫

Mode :
Indicates the UPnP operation mode. Possible modes are:on: Enable UPnP mode operation.
off: Disable UPnP mode operation.
When the mode is enabled, two ACEs are added automatically to trap UPNP related packets
to CPU. The ACEs are automatically removed when the mode is disabled.

⚫

TTL :
The TTL value is used by UPnP to send SSDP advertisement messages. Valid values are in therange 1 to 255.

⚫

Advertising Duration :The duration, carried in SSDP packets, is used to inform a control point or control points how
often it or they should receive an SSDP advertisement message from this switch. If a control
42

point does not receive any message within the duration, it will think that the switch no longer
exists. Due to the unreliable nature of UDP, in the standard it is recommended that suchrefreshing of advertisements to be done at less than one-half of the advertising duration. In
the implementation, the switch sends SSDP messages periodically at the interval one-half of
the advertising duration minus 30 seconds. Valid values are in the range 100 to 86400.
⚫

IP Addressing Mode
IP addressing mode provides two ways to determine IP address assignment:
Dynamic: Default selection for UPnP. UPnP module helps users choosing the IP address ofthe switch device. It finds the first available system IP address.
Static: User specifies the IP interface VLAN for choosing the IP address of the switch device.

⚫

Static VLAN Interface ID
The index of the specific IP VLAN interface. It will only be applied when IP Addressing Modeis static. Valid configurable values ranges from 1 to 4095. Default value is 1.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

432-6 OSPF

2-6.1 Configuration

2-6.1.1 Global Configuration

This is OSPF router configuration table. It is a general group to configure the OSPF common
router parameters.

Web Interface
To configure OSPF:
1.

Click System ,OSPF, Configuration and Global Configuration.

2.

Turn on or turn of OSPF Router Mode.

3.

Click Apply.

4.

Click Clear OSPF Process to reset OSPF

Figure 2-6.1.1: The Global Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

OSPF Router Mode :Enable/Disable the OSPF router mode.

⚫

Router ID :The OSPF Router ID in IPv4 address format(A.B.C.D).
When the router's OSPF Router ID is changed, if there is one or more fully adjacent neighbors
in current OSPF area, the new router ID will take effect after restart OSPF process. Notice that44

the router ID should be unique in the Autonomous System and value '0.0.0.0' is invalid since
it is reserved for the default algorithm.
Auto: The default algorithm will choose the largest IP address assigned to the router.
Specific: User specified router ID.
⚫

Default Passive Mode :Configure all interfaces as passive-interface by default.When an interface is configured as apassive-interface, the OSFP routing updates sending is suppressed, therefore the interface
does not establish adjacencies (No OSPF Hellos). The subnet of all interfaces (both passive
and active) is advertised by the OSPF router.

⚫

Default Metric :User specified default metric value for the OSPF routing protocol. The field is significant only
when the arugment 'IsSpecificDefMetric' is TRUE.
Auto: The default metric is calculated automatically based on the routing protocols.Specific:
User specified default metric.

⚫

Static Redistribute Metric Type :The OSPF redistributed metric type for the connected interfaces.
None: The static routes are not redistributed.
Specified Metric Value: User specified metric for the static routes.
External Type 1: External Type 1 of the static routes.
External Type 2: External Type 2 of the static routes.

⚫

Static Redistribute Metric Value :User specified metric value for the connected interfaces. The field is significant only when
the arugment 'ConnectedRedistMetricType' is configured as 'metricTypeSpecified'. The
allowed range is 0 to 1677214.

⚫

Connected Redistribute Metric Type :The OSPF redistributed metric type for the static routes.
None: The connected interfaces are not redistributed.
Specified Metric Value: User specified metric for the connected interfaces routes.
External Type 1: External Type 1 of the connected interfaces routes.
External Type 2: External Type 2 of the connected interfaces routes.

⚫

Connected Redistribute Metric Value :User specified metric value for the static routes.The field is significant only when thearugment 'StaticRedistMetricType' is configured as 'metricTypeSpecified'. The allowed range
is 0 to 1677214.
Buttons⚫

Clear OSPF Process :Click to reset the current OSPF process.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

45

2-6.1.2 Network Area

This is OSPF area configuration table. It is used to specify the OSPF enabled interface(s). When
OSPF is enabled on the specific interface(s), the router can provide the network information tothe other OSPF routers via those interfaces.

Web Interface
To configure OSPF Network Area Configuration:
1.

Click System ,OSPF, Configuration and Network Area.

2.

Click Add New Entry.

3.

Specify the Network Address, Mask Length and Area ID.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 2-6.1.2: The Network Area

Parameter description:⚫

OSPF Router Mode :Enable/Disable the OSPF router mode.

⚫

Router ID :The OSPF Router ID in IPv4 address format(A.B.C.D).
When the router's OSPF Router ID is changed, if there is one or more fully adjacent neighbors
in current OSPF area, the new router ID will take effect after restart OSPF process. Notice thatthe router ID should be unique in the Autonomous System and value '0.0.0.0' is invalid since
it is reserved for the default algorithm.
Auto: The default algorithm will choose the largest IP address assigned to the router.
Specific: User specified router ID.

⚫

Network Address :IPv4 network address.

⚫

Mask Length :IPv4 network mask length.

⚫

Area ID :The OSPF area ID.
Buttons⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add new entry.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
46

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

47

2-6.1.3 Passive Interface

This is OSPF router interface configuration table.

Web Interface
To configure OSPF Passive Interface Configuration:
1.

Click System ,OSPF, Configuration and Passive Interface.

2.

Specify the Interface VLAN and Passive Interface.

3.

Click Apply.

Figure 2-6.1.3: The Passive Interface

Parameter description:⚫

Interface :Interface identification.

⚫

Passive Interface :Enable the interface as OSPF passive-interface.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

48

2-6.1.4 Stub Area

This is OSPF stub area configuration table. The configuration is used to reduce the link-state
database size and therefore the memory and CPU requirement by forbidding some LSAs.

Web Interface
To configure OSPF Stub Area Configuration:
1.

Click System ,OSPF, Configuration and Stub Area.

2.

Specify the Area ID and No Summary.

3.

Click Apply.

Figure 2-6.1.4: The Stub Area

Parameter description:⚫

Interface :Interface identification.

⚫

Passive Interface :Enable the interface as OSPF passive-interface.

⚫

Area ID :The OSPF area ID.

⚫

No Summary :The value is true means the area is a totally stub area, which summary-LSAs(Type-3) except
for the default route and AS-external-LSAs(Type-5) are blocked. The value is false means thearea is a stub area, which summary-LSAs(Type-3) except for the default route are blocked.
Buttons⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add new entry.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

492-6.1.5 Area Authentication

This is OSPF area authentication configuration table. It is used to applied the authentication to
all the interfaces belong to the area.

Web Interface
To configure OSPF Area Authentication Configuration:
1.

Click System ,OSPF, Configuration and Area Authentication.

2.

Specify the Area ID and Auth. Type.

3.

Click Apply.

Figure 2-6.1.5: The Area Authenticaiton

Parameter description:⚫

Area ID :The OSPF area ID.

⚫

Auth. Type :The authentication type on an area is applied to all the interfaces belong to that area. The
authentication type on an IP interface or a virtual link overrides the authentication type on
an area and is useful if different interfaces in the same area use different authentication types.
Specify the authenticaton type.
Simple Password: Simple password authentication.
Message Digest: MD5 digest authentication.

Buttons⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add new entry.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

50

2-6.1.6 Area Range

This is OSPF area range configuration table. It is used to summarize the intra area paths from a
specific address range in one summary-LSA(Type-3) and advertised to other areas or configure
the address range status as 'DoNotAdvertise' which the summary-LSA(Type-3) is suppressed.
The area range configuration is used for Area Border Routers (ABRs) and only router-LSAs(Type1) and network-LSAs (Type-2) can be summarized. The AS-external-LSAs(Type-5) cannot besummarized because the scope is OSPF autonomous system (AS). The AS-external-LSAs(Type7) cannot be summarized because the feature is not supported yet.

Web Interface
To configure OSPF Area Range Configuration:
1.

Click System ,OSPF, Configuration and Area Range.

2.

Specify the Area ID, Network Address, Mask Length, Advertise and Cost.

3.

Click Apply.

Figure 2-6.1.6: The Area Range

Parameter description:⚫

Area ID :The OSPF area ID.

⚫

Network Address :IPv4 network address.

⚫

Mask Length :IPv4 network mask length.

⚫

Advertised :When the value is true, it summarizes intra area paths from the address range in one
summary-LSA(Type-3) and advertised to other areas. Otherwise, the intra area paths fromthe address range are not advertised to other areas.

⚫

Auto/Specific :When 'Auto' is selected, the cost value is set to 0 automatically and isn't allowed to be
configured.

⚫

Cost :
User specified cost (or metric) for this summary route. It is allowed to be configured only
when 'Specific' is selected and the allowed range is 0 to 65535.. The allowed range is 1 to16777215 and the default setting is 'auto cost' mode.

Buttons51

⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add new entry.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

522-6.1.7 Interface

This is interface configuration parameter table.

Web Interface
To configure OSPF Interface Configuration:
1.

Click System ,OSPF, Configuration and Interface.

2.

Specify the Priority, Cost, FastHelloRackets, Interval, Auth. Type, Change Simple Password
and MD key.

3.

Click Apply.

Figure 2-6.1.7: The Interface

Parameter description:⚫

Area ID :The OSPF area ID.

⚫

Interface :Interface identification.

⚫

Priority :User specified router priority for the interface. The allowed range is 0 to 255 and the default
value is 1.

⚫

Cost :
User specified cost for this interface. It's link state metric for the interface. The field issignificant only when 'IsSpecificCost' is TRUE. The allowed range is 1 to 65535 and the default
setting is 'auto cost' mode.

⚫

FastHelloPackets :How many Hello packets will be sent per second. The allowed range is 1 to 10 and the default
setting is disabled.

⚫

Hello Interval :How many Hello packets will be sent per second. The allowed range is 1 to 65535 and thedefault value is 10 (seconds).

⚫

Dead Interval :The time interval (in seconds) between hello packets. The allowed range is 1 to 65535 and thedefault value is 40 (seconds).

⚫

Retransmit Interval :53

The time interval (in seconds) between link-state advertisement(LSA) retransmissions for
adjacencies. The allowed range is 1 to 65535 and the default value is 5 (seconds).
⚫

Auth. Type :The authentication type.
Simple Password: It's using a plain text authentication. A password must be configured, but
the password can be read by sniffer the packets.
Message Digest: It's message-digest algorithm 5 (MD5) authentication. Keying material mustalso be configured. This is the most secure method.
Null Authentication: No authentication.
Area Configuration: Refer to Area authentication setting.

⚫

Change Simple Password :It is used to change the simple password (fill with plain text). The allowed input length is 1 to
8.

⚫

MD Key :Click the icon to edit the message digest key for the entry.

Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

542-6.1.8 Virtual Link

This is OSPF virtual link configuration table. The virtual link is established between 2 ABRs to
overcome that all the areas have to be connected directly to the backbone area.

Web Interface
To configure OSPF Virtual Link Configuration:
1.

Click System ,OSPF, Configuration and Virtual Link.

2.

Specify the Area ID, Router ID, Interal, Auth. Type, Changes Simple Password and MD key.

3.

Click Apply.

Figure 2-6.1.8: The Virtual Link

Parameter description:⚫

Area ID :The OSPF area ID.

⚫

Router ID :OSPF router ID.

⚫

Hello Interval :The time interval (in seconds) between hello packets. The allowed range is 1 to 65535 andthe default value is 10 (seconds).

⚫

Dead Interval :The number of seconds to wait until the neighbour is decalred to be dead. The allowed range
is 1 to 65535 and the default value is 40 (seconds).

⚫

Retransmit Interval :The time interval (in seconds) between link-state advertisement(LSA) retransmissions for
adjacencies. The allowed range is 1 to 65535 and the default value is 5 (seconds).

⚫

Auth. Type :The authentication type on an area.
Simple Password: It's using a plain text authentication. A password must be configured, but
the password can be read by sniffer the packets.
Message Digest: It's message-digest algorithm 5 (MD5) authentication. Keying material mustalso be configured. This is the most secure method.
Null Authentication: No authentication.
Area Configuration: Refer to Area authentication setting.

⚫

Change Simple Password :It is used to change the simple password (fill with plain text). The allowed input length is 155

to 8.
⚫

MD Key :Click the icon to edit the message digest key for the entry.

Buttons⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add new entry.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

56

2-6.2 Status

2-6.2.1 Global Status
This is OSPF router status table. It is used to provide the OSPF router status information.

Web Interface
To display the OSPF Global Status:
1.

Click System ,OSPF, Status and Global Status.

2.

Display the OSPF Global Status.

Figure 2-6.2.1: The Global Status

Parameter description:⚫

Area ID :The OSPF area ID.

⚫

Router ID :OSPF router ID.

⚫

SPF Delay :Delay time (in seconds)of SPF calculations.

⚫

SPF Hold Time :Minimum hold time (in milliseconds) between consecutive SPF calculations.

⚫

SPF Max. Wait Time :57

Maximum wait time (in milliseconds) between consecutive SPF calculations.
⚫

Last Executed SPF Time Stamp :Time (in milliseconds) that has passed between the start of the SPF algorithm execution andthe current time.

⚫

Min. LSA Interval :Minimum interval (in seconds) between link-state advertisements.

⚫

Min. LSA Arrival :Maximum arrival time (in milliseconds) of link-state advertisements.

⚫

External LSA Count :Number of external link-state advertisements.

⚫

External LSA Checksum :Number of external link-state checksum.

⚫

Attached Area Count :Number of areas attached for the router.

Buttons

Figure 2-6.2.1: The Global Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page.

⚫

Clear OSPF Process :Click to reset the current OSPF process.

58

2-6.2.2 Area Status

This is OSPF network area status table. It is used to provide the OSPF network area status
information.

Web Interface
To display the OSPF Area Status:
1.

Click System ,OSPF, Status and Area Status.

2.

Display the OSPF Area Status.

Figure 2-6.2.2: The Area Status

Parameter description:⚫

Area ID :The Area ID.

⚫

Backbone :Indicate if it's backbone area or not.

⚫

Area Type :The area type.

⚫

Active Interfaces :Number of active interfaces attached in the area.

⚫

Auth. Type :The authentication type in the area.

⚫

SPF Executed Times :Number of times SPF algorithm has been executed for the particular area.

⚫

LSA Count :Number of the total LSAs for the particular area.

⚫

Router LSA Count :Number of the router-LSAs(Type-1) of a given type for the particular area.

⚫

Router LSA Checksum :The router-LSAs(Type-1) checksum.

⚫

Network LSA Count :Number of the network-LSAs(Type-2) of a given type for the particular area.

⚫

Network LSA Checksum :The network-LSAs(Type-2) checksum.
59⚫

Summary LSA Count :Number of the summary-LSAs(Type-3) of a given type for the particular area.

⚫

Summary LSA Checksum :The the summary-LSAs(Type-3) checksum.

⚫

ASBR Summary LSA Count :Number of the ASBR-summary-LSAs(Type-4) of a given type for the particular area.

⚫

ASBR Summary LSA Checksum :The the ASBR-summary-LSAs(Type-4) checksum.

Buttons

Figure 2-6.2.2: The OSPF Area Status.

⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

60

2-6.2.3 Neighbor Status

This is OSPF IPv4 neighbor status table. It is used to provide the OSPF neighbor status
information.

Web Interface
To display the OSPF Neighbor Status:
1.

Click System ,OSPF, Status and Neighbor Status.

2.

Display the OSPF Neighbor Status.

Figure 2-6.2.3: The Neighbor Status

Parameter description:⚫

Area ID :The Area ID.

⚫

Backbone :Indicate if it's backbone area or not.

⚫

Neighbor ID :The Neighbor ID.

⚫

Priority :The priority of OSPF neighbor. It indicates the priority of the neighbor router. This item isused when selecting the DR for the network. The router with the highest priority becomesthe DR.

⚫

State :The state of OSPF neighbor. It indicates the functional state of the neighbor router.

⚫

Dead Time :Dead timer. It indicates the amount of time remaining that the router waits to receive an
OSPF hello packet from the neighbor before declaring the neighbor down.

⚫

Interface Address :The IP address.

⚫

Interface :The network interface.

Buttons

Figure 2-6.2.3: The OSPF Neighbor Status.

61⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

62

2-6.2.4 Interface Status

This is OSPF IPv4 neighbor status table. It is used to provide the OSPF neighbor status
information.

Web Interface
To display the OSPF Interface Status:
1.

Click System ,OSPF, Status and Interface Status.

2.

Display the OSPF Interface Status.

Figure 2-6.2.3: The Interface Status

Parameter description:⚫

Area ID :The Area ID.

⚫

Interface :Interface identification.

⚫

Interface Address :IPv4 network address.

⚫

Area ID :The OSPF area ID.

⚫

Router ID :The OSPF router ID.

⚫

State :The state of the link.

⚫

DR ID :The router ID of DR.

⚫

DR Address :The IP address of DR.

⚫

BDR ID :The router ID of BDR.

⚫

BDR Address :The IP address of BDR.

⚫

Priority :The OSPF priority. It helps determine the DR and BDR on the network to which this interface63

is connected.
⚫

Cost :
The cost of the interface.

⚫

Hello :
Hello timer. A time interval that a router sends an OSPF hello packet.

⚫

Dead :
Dead timer. Dead timer is a time interval to wait before declaring a neighbor dead. The unitof time is the second.

⚫

Wait :
This interval is used in Wait Timer. Wait timer is a single shot timer that causes the interface
to exit waiting and select a DR on the network. Wait Time interval is the same as Dead timeinterval.

⚫

Retransmit :Retransmit timer. A time interval to wait before retransmitting a database description packet
when it has not been acknowledged.

⚫

Hello Timer :Hello due timer. An OSPF hello packet will be sent on this interface after this due time.

⚫

Nbr Count :Neighbor count. This is the number of OSPF neighbors discovered on this interface.

⚫

Adjacent Nbr Count :Adjacent neighbor count. This is the number of routers running OSPF that are fully adjacentwith this router.

⚫

Passive :Indicate if the interface is passive interface.

⚫

Transmit Delay :The estimated time to transmit a link-state update packet on the interface.

Buttons

Figure 2-6.2.3: The OSPF Neighbor Status.

⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

64Chapter 3

Port Management

The section describes to configure the Port detail parameters of the switch. Others you could
use the Port configure to enable or disable the Port of the switch. Monitor the ports content or
status in the function.

3-1 Port Configuration
This page displays current port configurations. Ports can also be configured here.

Web Interface
To configure a Current Port Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Port Management and Port Configuration.

2.

Specify the detail Port alias or description an alphanumeric string describing the full nameand version identification for the system’s hardware type, software version, and networking
application.

3.

Specify the Speed Configured, Flow Control, Maximum Frame Size.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 3-1: The Port Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Port :
This is the logical port number for this row.

⚫

Description :Enter up to 63 characters to be descriptive name for identifies this port.

⚫

Link :
65

The current link state is displayed graphically. Green indicates the link is up and red that it is
down.
⚫

Current Link Speed Status:
Provides the current link speed of the port.

⚫

Configured Link Speed :Selects any available link speed for the given switch port. Only speeds supported by the
specific port is shown. Possible speeds are:
Disabled - Disables the switch port operation.
Auto - Port auto negotiating speed with the link partner and selects the highest speed thatis compatible with the link partner.
10Mbps HDX - Forces the cu port in 10Mbps half duplex mode.
10Mbps FDX - Forces the cu port in 10Mbps full duplex mode.
100Mbps HDX - Forces the cu port in 100Mbps half duplex mode.
100Mbps FDX - Forces the cu port in 100Mbps full duplex mode.
1Gbps FDX - Forces the port in 1Gbps full duplexFlow Control :When Auto Speed is selected on a port, this section indicates the flow control capability thatis advertised to the link partner. When a fixed-speed setting is selected, that is what is used.
The Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed, and theCurrent Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted. The Rx andTx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto-Negotiation.
Check the configured column to use flow control. This setting is related to the setting for
Configured Link Speed.

⚫

Maximum Frame SizeEnter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port, including FCS. The range is 151810240 bytes.
Buttons⚫

Refresh :You can click them for refresh the Port link Status by manual⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

663-2 Port Statistics
The section describes to the Port statistics information and provides overview of general traffic
statistics for all switch ports.

Web Interface
To Display the Port Statistics Overview in the web interface:
1.

Click Port Management and Port Statistics.

2.

If you want to auto-refresh then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “ Refresh“ to refresh the port statistics or clear all information when you click “ Clear”.

4.

If you want to see the detail of port statistic then you need to click that port.

Figure 3-2: The Port Statistics Overview

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

⚫

Packets :The number of received and transmitted packets per port.

⚫

Bytes :The number of received and transmitted bytes per port.

⚫

Errors :The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per
port.

⚫

Drops :The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion.

⚫

Filtered
The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process.
Buttons

67

Figure 3-2: The Port Statistics Overview buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page.

⚫

Clear :
Clears the counters for all ports.

If you want to see the detail of port statistic then you need to click that port. The displayedcounters are the totals for receive and transmit, the size counters for receive and transmit, andthe error counters for receive and transmit.

68Figure 3-2: The Detailed Port Statistics

Parameter description:⚫

Upper left scroll bar:
To scroll which port to display the Port statistics with “Port-1”, “Port-2”, ...
Receive Total and Transmit Total⚫

Rx and Tx Packets :The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets.

⚫

Rx and Tx Octets :The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) bytes. Includes FCS, but excludes
framing bits.

⚫

Rx and Tx Unicast :The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) unicast packets.

⚫

Rx and Tx Multicast :The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) multicast packets.

⚫

Rx and Tx Broadcast :The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) broadcast packets.

⚫

Rx and Tx Pause :A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an opcode
indicating a PAUSE operation.
Receive and Transmit Size Counters
The number of received and transmitted (good and bad) packets split into categories based on
their respective frame sizes.
Receive Error Counters⚫

Rx Drops :The number of frames dropped due to lack of receive buffers or egress congestion.

⚫

Rx CRC/Alignment :The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors.

⚫

Rx Undersize :The number of short 1 frames received with valid CRC.

⚫

Rx Oversize :69

The number of long 2 frames received with valid CRC.
⚫

Rx Fragments :The number of short 1 frames received with invalid CRC.

⚫

Rx Jabber :The number of long 2 frames received with invalid CRC. .
Transmit Error Counters⚫

Tx Drops :The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion.

⚫

Tx Late/Exc. Coll. :The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions.

⚫

Tx Oversize :The number of frames dropped due to frame oversize.
Buttons

Figure 3-2: The Detailed Port Statistics buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page.

⚫

Clear :
Clears the counters for the selected port.

70

3-3 SFP Port Info
The section describes that switch could display the SFP module detail information which youconnect it to the switch. The information includes: Connector type, Fiber type, wavelength, bitrate and Vendor OUI etc.

Web Interface
To Display the SFP information in the web interface:
1.

Click Port Management and SFP Port Info.

2.

To display the SFP Information.

Figure 3-3: The SFP Port Information

Parameter description:⚫

Upper left scroll bar:
To scroll which port to display the Port statistics.

⚫

Connector Type:
Display the connector type, for instance, UTP, SC, ST, LC and so on.

⚫

Fiber Type:
Display the fiber mode, for instance, Multi-Mode, Single-Mode.

⚫

Tx Central Wavelength:
Display the fiber optical transmitting central wavelength, for instance, 850nm, 1310nm,
1550nm and so on.

⚫

Bit Rate:
Displays the nominal bit rate of the transceiver.

⚫

Vendor OUI:
Display the Manufacturer's OUI code which is assigned by IEEE.

⚫

Vendor Name:
Display the company name of the module manufacturer.
71

⚫

Vendor P/N:
Display the product name of the naming by module manufacturer.

⚫

Vendor Rev (Revision):
Display the module revision.

⚫

Vendor SN (Serial Number):Show the serial number assigned by the manufacturer.

⚫

Date Code:Show the date this SFP module was made.

⚫

Temperature:Show the current temperature of SFP module.

⚫

Vcc:
Show the working DC voltage of SFP module.

⚫

Mon1(Bias) mA:
Show the Bias current of SFP module.

⚫

Mon2(TX PWR):
Show the transmit power of SFP module.

⚫

Mon3(RX PWR):
Show the receiver power of SFP module.
Buttons

Figure 3-3: The SFP Port Information buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page.

72

3-4 Energy Efficient Ethernet
EEE is an abbreviation for Energy Efficient Ethernet defined in IEEE 802.3az.
This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current EEE port settings.
EEE is a power saving option that reduces the power usage when there is very low traffic
utilization (or no traffic).
EEE works by powering down circuits when there is no traffic. When a port gets data to betransmitted all circuits are powered up. The time it takes to power up the circuits is named
wakeup time. The default wakeup time is 17 us for 1Gbit links and 30 us for other linkspeeds. EEE devices must agree upon the value of the wakeup time in order to make sure thatboth the receiving and transmitting device has all circuits powered up when traffic is transmitted.
The devices can exchange information about the devices wakeup time using the LLDP protocol.

Web Interface
To configure an Energy Efficient Ethernet in the web interface:
1.

Click Port Management and Energy Efficient Ethernet.

2.

Select enable or disable Energy Efficient Ethernet by the port.

3.

Click the apply to save the setting.

4.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

Figure 4-4: The Energy Efficient Ethernet Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The switch port number of the logical EEE port.

⚫

Configure :Controls whether EEE is enabled for this switch port.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

733-5 Link Aggregation
3-5.1 Static Configuration
This page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group.

Web Interface
To configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group in the web interface:
1.

Click Port Management, Link Aggregation and Static Configuration.

2.

Evoke to enable or disable the aggregation mode function.

3.

Evoke Aggregation Group ID and Port members.

4.

Click Apply to save the setting.

5.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

Figure 3-5.1: The Static Configuration

Parameter description :Hash Code Contributors⚫

Source MAC Address :The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Checkto enable the use of the Source MAC address, or uncheck to disable. By default, Source MAC
Address is enabled.

⚫

Destination MAC Address :The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame.
Check to enable the use of the Destination MAC Address, or uncheck to disable. By default,
Destination MAC Address is disabled.

⚫

IP Address :The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Check to enable
74the use of the IP Address, or uncheck to disable. By default, IP Address is enabled.
⚫

TCP/UDP Port Number :The TCP/UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame. Checkto enable the use of the TCP/UDP Port Number, or uncheck to disable. By default, TCP/UDP
Port Number is enabled.
Aggregation Group Configuration⚫

Group ID :Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row. Group ID "Normal"
indicates there is no aggregation. Only one group ID is valid per port.

⚫

Port Members :Each switch port is listed for each group ID. Select a radio button to include a port in an
aggregation, or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation. By default,
no ports belong to any aggregation group. Only full duplex ports can join an aggregationand ports must be in the same speed in each group.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

75

3-5.2 LACP Configuration
This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations, and possibly change
them as well.

Web Interface
To configure the LACP Port Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Port Management, Link Aggregation and LACP Configuration.

2.

Evoke to enable or disable the LACP on the port of the switch.

3.

Scroll the Key parameter with Auto or Specific. Default is Auto.

4.

Scroll the Role with Active or Passive. Default is Active.

5.

Click Apply to save the setting.

6.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

Figure 3-5.2: The Lacp Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The switch port number.

⚫

LACP Enabled :Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port. LACP will form an aggregation when
2 or more ports are connected to the same partner.

⚫

Key :
The Key value incurred by the port, range 1-65535 . The Auto setting will set the key as
appropriate by the physical link speed, 10Mb = 1, 100Mb = 2, 1Gb = 3. Using the Specificsetting, a user-defined value can be entered. Ports with the same Key value can participate
in the same aggregation group, while ports with different keys cannot.

⚫

Role :The Role shows the LACP activity status. The Active will transmit LACP packets each second,
while Passive will wait for a LACP packet from a partner (speak if spoken to).

⚫

Timeout :The Timeout controls the period between BPDU transmissions. Fast will transmit LACP
packets each second, while Slow will wait for 30 seconds before sending a LACP packet.

⚫

Prio :The Prio controls the priority of the port. If the LACP partner wants to form a larger group76

than is supported by this device then this parameter will control which ports will be active
and which ports will be in a backup role. Lower number means greater priority.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

773-5.3 System Status
This section describes that when you complete to set LACP function on the switch then it
provides a status overview for all LACP instances

Web Interface
To display the LACP System status in the web interface:
1.

Click Port Management, Link Aggregation and System Status.

2.

Checked “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the port detailed statistics.

Figure 3-5.3: The LACP System Status

Parameter description:⚫

Aggr ID :The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance. For LLAG the id is shown as'isid: aggr-id' and for GLAGs as 'aggr-id'⚫

Partner System ID :The system ID (MAC address) of the aggregation partner.

⚫

Partner Key :The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID.

⚫

Partner Prio
The priority that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID.

⚫

Last changed :The time since this aggregation changed.

⚫

Local Ports :Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch. The format is: "Switch
ID:Port".
Buttons

Figure 3-5.3: The LACP System Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page.
78

3-5.4 Internal Status
This page provides a status overview for the LACPinternal (i.e. local system) status for all ports.
Only ports that are part of an LACP group are shown. For details on the shown parameters
please refer to IEEE 801.AX-2014.

Web Interface
To display the LACP Internal System status in the web interface:
1.

Click Port Management, Link Aggregation and Internal Status.

2.

Checked “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the port detailed statistics.

Figure 3-5.4: The LACP Internal Status

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The switch port number.

⚫

State :
The current port state:
Down: The port is not active.
Active: The port is in active state.
Standby: The port is in standby state.

⚫

Key :
The key assigned to this port. Only ports with the same key can aggregate together.

⚫

Priority :The priority assigned to this aggregation group.

⚫

Activity :The LACP mode of the group (Active or Passive).

⚫

Timeout :The timeout mode configured for the port (Fast or Slow).

⚫

Aggregation :Show whether the system considers this link to be "aggregateable"; i.e., a potential candidate
for aggregation.

⚫

Synchronization :Show whether the system considers this link to be "IN_SYNC"; i.e., it has been allocated tothe correct LAG, the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator, and theidentity of the LAG is consistent with the System ID and operational Key informationtransmitted.
79⚫

Collecting :Show if collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled.

⚫

Distributing :Show if distribution of outgoing frames on this link is enabled.

⚫

Defaulted :Show if the Actor's Receive machine is using Defaulted operational Partner information.

⚫

Expired :Show if that the Actor's Receive machine is in the EXPIRED state.
Buttons

Figure 3-5.4: The LACP Internal Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page.

80

3-5.5 Neighbor Status
This page provides a status overview for the LACPneighbor status for all ports. Only ports that are partof an LACP group are shown. For details on the shown parameters please refer to IEEE 801.AX-2014.

Web Interface
To display the LACP Neighbor Port status in the web interface:
1.

Click Port Management, Link Aggregation and Neighbor Status.

2.

Checked “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the port detailed statistics.

Figure 3-5.5: The LACP Neighbor Port Status

Parameter description:⚫

Aggr ID :The aggregation group ID which the port is assigned to.

⚫

Port :The switch port number.

⚫

State :
The current port state:
Down: The port is not active.
Active: The port is in active state.
Standby: The port is in standby state.

⚫

Partner Key
The key assigned to this port by the partner.

⚫

Partner Port
The partner port number associated with this link.

⚫

Partner Port Priority
The priority assigned to this partner port .

⚫

Activity :The LACP mode of the group (Active or Passive).

⚫

Timeout :The timeout mode configured for the port (Fast or Slow).

⚫

Aggregation :Show whether the system considers this link to be "aggregateable"; i.e., a potential candidate
for aggregation.
81

⚫

Synchronization :Show whether the system considers this link to be "IN_SYNC"; i.e., it has been allocated tothe correct LAG, the group has been associated with a compatible Aggregator, and theidentity of the LAG is consistent with the System ID and operational Key informationtransmitted.

⚫

Collecting :Show if collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled.

⚫

Distributing :Show if distribution of outgoing frames on this link is enabled.

⚫

Defaulted :Show if the Actor's Receive machine is using Defaulted operational Partner information.

⚫

Expired :Show if that the Actor's Receive machine is in the EXPIRED state.
Buttons

Figure 3-5.5: The LACP Neighbor Port Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page.

82

3-5.6 Port Status
This section describes that when you complete to set LACP function on the switch then it
provides a Port Status overview for all LACP instances

Web Interface
To display the LACP Port status in the web interface:
1.

Click Port Management, Link Aggregation and Port Status.

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the LACP Port Status.

Figure 3-5.6: The LACP Status

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The switch port number.

⚫

LACP :'Yes' means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up. 'No' means that LACP is not enabledor that the port link is down. 'Backup' means that the port could not join the aggregationgroup but will join if other port leaves. Meanwhile it's LACP status is disabled.

⚫

Key :
The key assigned to this port. Only ports with the same key can aggregate together.

⚫

Aggr ID :The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group. IDs 1 and 2 are GLAGs while IDs 314 are LLAGs.

⚫

Partner System ID :The partner's System ID (MAC address).

⚫

Partner Port :The partner's port number connected to this port.

⚫

Partner Prio:
The partner's port priority.
Buttons

83

Figure 3-5.4: The Port Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page.

84

3-6 Loop Protection
3-6.1 Configuration
The loop Protection is used to detect the presence of traffic. When switch receives packet’s(looping detection frame) MAC address the same as oneself from port, show Loop Protection
happens. The port will be locked when it received the looping Protection frames. If you want toresume the locked port, please find out the looping path and take off the looping path, thenselect the resume the locked port and click on “Resume” to turn on the locked ports.

Web Interface
To configure the Loop Protection parameters in the web interface:
1.

Click Port Management, Loop Protection and Configuration.

2.

Evoke to select enable or disable the port loop Protection.

3.

Click the apply to save the setting.

4.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

Figure 3-6.1: The Loop Protection Configuration

Parameter description :Global Configuration⚫

Enable Loop Protection :Controls whether loop protections is enabled (as a whole).

⚫

Transmission Time :The interval between each loop protection PDU sent on each port. Valid values are 1 to 10
seconds.

⚫

Shutdown Time :The period (in seconds) for which a port will be kept disabled in the event of a loop is
detected (and the port action shuts down the port). Valid values are 10 to 604800 seconds (785days).
Port Configuration⚫

Port :The switch port number of the port.

⚫

Enable :Controls whether loop protection is enabled on this switch port⚫

Action:Configures the action performed when a loop is detected on a port. Valid values are Shutdown Port,
Shutdown Port and Log or Log Only.

⚫

Tx Mode :Controls whether the port is actively generating loop protection PDU's, or whether it is just passively
looking for looped PDU's.

Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

863-6.2 Status
This section displays the loop protection port status the ports of the currently selected switch.

Web Interface
To display the Loop Protection status in the web interface:
1.

Click Port Management, Loop Protection and Status.

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the Loop Protection Status.

Figure 3-6.2: Loop Protection Status

Parameter description:⚫

Port
The switch port number of the logical port.

⚫

ActionThe currently configured port action.

⚫

Transmit
The currently configured port transmit mode.

⚫

Loops
The number of loops detected on this port.

⚫

Status
The current loop protection status of the port.

⚫

Loop
Whether a loop is currently detected on the port.

⚫

Time of Last Loop
The time of the last loop event detected.

Buttons

Figure 3-6.2: Loop Protection Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :87

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.
⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

88

3-7 UDLD
3-7.1 UDLD Configuration
This page allows the user to inspect the current UDLD configurations, and possibly change themas well.

Web Interface
To configure the UDLD parameters in the web interface:
1.

Click Port Management, UDLD and UDLD Configuration.

2.

Evoke to select enable or disable the port UDLD.

3.

Specify the Message Interval.

4.

Click the apply to save the setting.

5.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

Figure 3-7.1: The UDLD Configuration

Parameter description :⚫

Port :
Port number of the switch.

⚫

UDLD Mode :Configures the UDLD mode on a port. Valid values are Disable, Normal and Aggressive.
Default mode is Disable.
Disable: In disabled mode, UDLD functionality doesn't exists on port.
Normal: In normal mode, if the link state of the port was determined to be unidirectional, it
will not affect the port state.
Aggressive: In aggressive mode, unidirectional detected ports will get shutdown. To bringback the ports up, need to disable UDLDon that port.

⚫

Message Interval :Configures the period of time between UDLD probe messages on ports that are in theadvertisement phase and are determined to be bidirectional. The range is from 7 to 90
seconds(Default value is 7 seconds)(Currently default time interval is supported, due to lackof detailed information in RFC 5171).
Buttons89

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

903-7.2 UDLD Status
This page displays the UDLD status of the ports

Web Interface
To display the Loop Protection status in the web interface:
1.

Click Port Management, UDLD and UDLD Status.

2.

Select port that you want to display the UDLD Status.

3.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto refresh”.

4.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the Loop Protection Status.

Figure 3-7.2: UDLD Status

Parameter description :UDLD port status⚫

UDLD Admin State :The current port state of the logical port, Enabled if any of state(Normal,Aggressive) is
Enabled.
Device ID(local): The ID of Device.
Device Name(local): Name of the Device.
Bidirectional State: The current state of the port.
Neighbour Status⚫

Port :
The current port of neighbour device.

⚫

Device ID :The current ID of neighbour device.

⚫

Link Status :91

The current link status of neighbour port.
⚫

Device Name :Name of the Neighbour Device.
Buttons

Figure 3-7.2: UDLD Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

Port 1 :Select port that you want to display the DHCP Detailed Statistics.

92

Chapter 4

VLAN Management

4-1 VLAN Configuration
To assign a specific VLAN for management purpose. The management VLAN is used to establish
an IP connection to the switch from a workstation connected to a port in the VLAN. Thisconnection supports a VSM, SNMP, and Telnet session. By default, the active management
VLAN is VLAN 1, but you can designate any VLAN as the management VLAN using theManagement VLAN window. Only one management VLAN can be active at a time.
When you specify a new management VLAN, your HTTP connection to the old management
VLAN is lost. For this reason, you should have a connection between your management station
and a port in the new management VLAN or connect to the new management VLAN through amulti-VLAN route

Web Interface
To configure VLAN membership configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click VLAN Management and VLAN Configuration.

2.

Modify Global VLAN Configuration parameter.

3.

Scroll the Mode, Port VLAN and Port Type to enable the Port VLAN Configuration parameter.

4.

Click the Apply to save the setting.

5.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

Figure 4-1: The VLAN Configuration

Parameter description:
Global VLAN Configuration
93

⚫

Allowed Access VLANs :This field shows the VLANs that are created on the switch.
By default, only VLAN 1 exists. More VLANs may be created by using a list syntax where theindividual elements are separated by commas. Ranges are specified with a dash separating
the lower and upper bound.
The following example will create VLANs 1, 10, 11, 12, 13, 200, and 300: 1,10-13,200,300.
Spaces are allowed in between the delimiters.

⚫

Ethertype for Custom S-ports :This field specifies the ethertype/TPID (specified in hexadecimal) used for Custom S-ports.
The setting is in force for all ports whose Port Type is set to S-Custom-Port.
Port VLAN Configuration⚫

Port :
This is the logical port number of this row.

⚫

Mode :The port mode (default is Access) determines the fundamental behavior of the port inquestion. A port can be in one of three modes as described below.
Whenever a particular mode is selected, the remaining fields in that row will be either grayedout or made changeable depending on the mode in question.
Grayed out fields show the value that the port will get when the mode is applied.
Access:Access ports are normally used to connect to end stations. Dynamic features like Voice VLAN
may add the port to more VLANs behind the scenes. Access ports have the following
characteristics:• Member of exactly one VLAN, the Port VLAN (a.k.a. Access VLAN), which by default is 1,• accepts untagged frames and C-tagged frames,• discards all frames that are not classified to the Access VLAN,• on egress all frames are transmitted untagged.
Trunk:
Trunk ports can carry traffic on multiple VLANs simultaneously, and are normally used toconnect to other switches. Trunk ports have the following characteristics:• By default, a trunk port is member of all existing VLANs. This may be limited by the use of
Allowed VLANs,• unless VLAN Trunking is enabled on the port, frames classified to a VLAN that the port is
not a member of will be discarded,• by default, all frames but frames classified to the Port VLAN (a.k.a. Native VLAN) get
tagged on egress. Frames classified to the Port VLAN do not get C-tagged on egress,• egress tagging can be changed to tag all frames, in which case only tagged frames are
accepted on ingress,• VLAN trunking may be enabled.
Hybrid:Hybrid ports resemble trunk ports in many ways, but adds additional port configuration
features. In addition to the characteristics described for trunk ports, hybrid ports have theseabilities:• Can be configured to be VLAN tag unaware, C-tag aware, S-tag aware, or S-custom-tag
aware,• ingress filtering can be controlled,• ingress acceptance of frames and configuration of egress tagging can be configured
independently.
94⚫

Port VLAN :Determines the port's VLAN ID (a.k.a. PVID). Allowed VLANs are in the range 1 through 4095,
default being 1.
On ingress, frames get classified to the Port VLAN if the port is configured as VLAN unaware,
the frame is untagged, or VLAN awareness is enabled on the port, but the frame is priority
tagged (VLAN ID = 0).
On egress, frames classified to the Port VLAN do not get tagged if Egress Tagging
configuration is set to untag Port VLAN.
The Port VLAN is called an "Access VLAN" for ports in Access mode and Native VLAN for
ports in Trunk or Hybrid mode.

⚫

Port Type :Ports in hybrid mode allow for changing the port type, that is, whether a frame's VLAN tag
is used to classify the frame on ingress to a particular VLAN, and if so, which TPID it reacts
on. Likewise, on egress, the Port Type determines the TPID of the tag, if a tag is required.
Unaware:On ingress, all frames, whether carrying a VLAN tag or not, get classified to the Port VLAN,
and possible tags are not removed on egress.
C-Port:On ingress, frames with a VLAN tag with TPID = 0x8100 get classified to the VLAN ID
embedded in the tag. If a frame is untagged or priority tagged, the frame gets classified to
the Port VLAN. If frames must be tagged on egress, they will be tagged with a C-tag.
S-Port:On ingress, frames with a VLAN tag with TPID = 0x8100 or 0x88A8 get classified to the VLAN
ID embedded in the tag. If a frame is untagged or priority tagged, the frame gets classified
to the Port VLAN. If frames must be tagged on egress, they will be tagged with an S-tag.
S-Custom-Port:
On ingress, frames with a VLAN tag with a TPID = 0x8100 or equal to the Ethertype
configured for Custom-S ports get classified to the VLAN ID embedded in the tag. If a frame
is untagged or priority tagged, the frame gets classified to the Port VLAN. If frames must be
tagged on egress, they will be tagged with the custom S-tag.

⚫

Ingress Filtering :Hybrid ports allow for changing ingress filtering. Access and Trunk ports always have ingressfiltering enabled.
If ingress filtering is enabled (checkbox is checked), frames classified to a VLAN that the port
is not a member of get discarded.
If ingress filtering is disabled, frames classified to a VLAN that the port is not a member ofare accepted and forwarded to the switch engine. However, the port will never transmit
frames classified to VLANs that it is not a member of.

⚫

Ingress Acceptance :Hybrid ports allow for changing the type of frames that are accepted on ingress.
Tagged and untagged
both tagged and untagged frames are accepted.
Tagged Only
Only tagged frames are accepted on ingress. Untagged frames are discarded.
Untagged Only
95

Only untagged frames are accepted on ingress. Tagged frames are discarded.
⚫

Egress Tagging :Ports in Trunk and Hybrid mode may control the tagging of frames on egress.
Untag Port VLAN
Frames classified to the Port VLAN are transmitted untagged. Other frames are transmittedwith the relevant tag.
Tag All
All frames, whether classified to the Port VLAN or not, are transmitted with a tag.
Untag AllAll frames, whether classified to the Port VLAN or not, are transmitted without a tag.
This option is only available for ports in Hybrid mode.

⚫

Allowed VLANs :Ports in Trunk and Hybrid mode may control which VLANs they are allowed to become
members of. Access ports can only be member of one VLAN, the Access VLAN.
The field's syntax is identical to the syntax used in the Existing VLANs field. By default, a port
may become member of all possible VLANs, and is therefore set to 1-4095.
The field may be left empty, which means that the port will not be member of any of theexisting VLANs, but if it is configured for VLAN Trunking it will still be able to carry all
unknown VLANs.

⚫

Forbidden VLANs :A port may be configured to never be member of one or more VLANs. This is particularly
useful when dynamic VLAN protocols like MVRP and GVRP must be prevented fromdynamically adding ports to VLANs.
The trick is to mark such VLANs as forbidden on the port in question. The syntax is identicalto the syntax used in the Enabled VLANs field.
By default, the field is left blank, which means that the port may become a member of all
possible VLANs.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

964-2 VLAN MembershipThis page provides an overview of membership status of VLAN users.
The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.

Web Interface
To configure VLAN membership configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click VLAN Management and VLAN membership.

2.

Scroll the bar to choice which VLANs would like to show up.

3.

Click Refresh to update the state.

Figure 4-2: The VLAN Membership

Parameter description:⚫

VLAN USER :Various internal software modules may use VLAN services to configure VLAN memberships
on the fly.
The drop-down list on the right allows for selecting between showing VLAN memberships
as configured by an administrator (Admin) or as configured by one of these internal softwaremodules.
The "Combined" entry will show a combination of the administrator and internal softwaremodules configuration, and basically reflects what is actually configured in hardware.
VLAN User module uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN
memberships and VLAN port configurations such as PVID and UVID. Currently we support
the following VLAN user types:
NAS : NAS provides port-based authentication, which involves communications between a
Supplicant, Authenticator, and an Authentication Server.
GVRP : Adjacent VLAN-aware devices can exchange VLAN information with each other byusing Generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP). GVRP is based on the Generic Attribute
Registration Protocol (GARP) and propagates VLAN information throughout a bridged
network.
MVR : MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each
VLAN. Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single (multicast) VLAN.
Voice VLAN : Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originatingfrom IP phones.
MSTP : The 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol (MSTP) uses VLANs to create multiple
spanning trees in a network, which significantly improves network resource utilization while
maintaining a loop-free environment.
97

DMS: Shows DMS VLAN membership status.
VCL : Shows MAC-based VLAN entries configured by various MAC-based VLAN users.
⚫

VLAN ID :VLAN ID for which the Port members are displayed.

⚫

Port Members :A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID.
If a port is included in a VLAN, an image
andwill be displayed. Shows egress filtering
frame status whether tagged or untagged. Frames classified to the Port VLAN are transmitted
tagged(⚫

) or untagged().

VLAN Membership :The VLAN Membership Status Page shall show the current VLAN port members for all VLANs
configured by a selected VLAN User (selection shall be allowed by a Combo Box). When
combined Users are selected, it shall show this information for all the VLAN Users, and thisis by default. VLAN membership allows the frames classified to the VLAN ID to be forwardedon the respective VLAN member ports.

⚫

Show entries :You can choose how many items you want to show up.
:⚫

You can choose the Vlan User.
Buttons

Figure 5-2: The VLAN Membership buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page.

⚫

First Page :Updates the system log entries, turn to the first page.

⚫

Next Page :Updates the system log entries, turn to the next page.

98

4-3 VLAN Port Status
The function Port Status gathers the information of all VLAN status and reports it by the orderof Combined, Admin, NAS, GVRP, MVR, Voice VLAN, MSTP, DMS, VCL.

Web Interface
To Display VLAN Port Status in the web interface:
1.

Click VLAN Management and VLAN Port Status.

2.

Specify the Combined, Admin, NAS, GVRP, MVR, Voice VLAN, MSTP, DMS, VCL, RMirror.

3.

Display Port Status information.

Figure 4-3: The VLAN Port Status

Parameter description:⚫

VLAN USER :VLAN User module uses services of the VLAN management functionality to configure VLAN
memberships and VLAN port configuration such as PVID, UVID. Currently we support
following VLAN User types:
NAS : NAS provides port-based authentication, which involves communications between a
Supplicant, Authenticator, and an Authentication Server.
GVRP : Adjacent VLAN-aware devices can exchange VLAN information with each other byusing Generic VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP). GVRP is based on the Generic Attribute
Registration Protocol (GARP) and propagates VLAN information throughout a bridged
network.
MVR : MVR is used to eliminate the need to duplicate multicast traffic for subscribers in each
VLAN. Multicast traffic for all channels is sent only on a single (multicast) VLAN.
Voice VLAN : Voice VLAN is a VLAN configured specially for voice traffic typically originatingfrom IP phones.
MSTP : The 802.1s Multiple Spanning Tree protocol (MSTP) uses VLANs to create multiple
spanning trees in a network, which significantly improves network resource utilization while
maintaining a loop-free environment.
DMS: Shows DMS VLAN membership status.
VCL : shows MAC-based VLAN entries configured by various MAC-based VLAN users.

⚫

Port :The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

⚫

Port Type :99Shows the Port Type. Port type can be any of Unaware, C-port, S-port, Custom S-port.
If Port Type is Unaware, all frames are classified to the Port VLAN ID and tags are not removed.
C-port is Customer Port. S-port is Service port. Custom S-port is S-port with Custom TPID.
⚫

Ingress Filtering :Shows the ingress filtering on a port. This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing. If
ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classified VLAN, theframe is discarded.

⚫

Frame Type :Shows whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames. This parameter affects
VLAN ingress processing. If the port only accepts tagged frames, untagged frames received
on that port are discarded.

⚫

Port VLAN ID :Shows the Port VLAN ID (PVID) that a given user wants the port to have.
The field is empty if not overridden by the selected user.

⚫

Tx Tag :Shows egress filtering frame status whether tagged or untagged.

⚫

Untagged VLAN ID :If Tx Tag is overridden by the selected user and is set to Tag or Untag UVID, then this field
will show the VLAN ID the user wants to tag or untag on egress.
The field is empty if not overridden by the selected user.

⚫

Conflicts :Two users may have conflicting requirements to a port's configuration. For instance, one user
may require all frames to be tagged on egress while another requires all frames to be
untagged on egress.
Since both users cannot win, this gives rise to a conflict, which is solved in a prioritized way.
The Administrator has the least priority. Other software modules are prioritized according totheir position in the drop-down list: The higher in the list, the higher priority.
If conflicts exist, it will be displayed as "Yes" for the "Combined" user and the offending
software module.
The "Combined" user reflects what is actually configured in hardware.
:⚫

You can choose the Vlan User.
Buttons

Figure 5-3: The VLAN Port Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page.

100

4-4 MAC-based VLAN
4-4.1 Configuration
The MAC address to VLAN ID mappings can be configured here. This page allows adding anddeleting MAC-based VLAN Classification List entries and assigning the entries to different
ports.

Web Interface
To configure MAC address-based VLAN configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click VLAN Management, MAC-based VLAN and Configuration.

2.

Click “Add New Entry”.

3.

Specify the MAC address and VLAN ID.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 4-4.1: The MAC-based VLAN Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

MAC Address :Indicates the MAC address.

⚫

VLAN ID :Indicates the VLAN ID.

⚫

Port Members :A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each MAC to VLAN ID mapping entry. To
include a port in the mapping, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from themapping, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes
are unchecked.
Buttons⚫

Adding New Entry :101

Click to add a new MAC-based VLAN entry. An empty row is added to the table, and the
MAC-based VLAN entry can be configured as needed. Any unicast MAC address can be
configured for the MAC-based VLAN entry. No broadcast or multicast MAC addresses areallowed. Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.
⚫

Delete :To delete a MAC-based VLAN entry, check this box and press apply. The entry will be deleted
on the selected switch in the stack.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Figure 5-4-1: The MAC-based VLAN Configuration buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page.

⚫

First Page :Updates the system log entries, turn to the first page.

⚫

Next Page :Updates the system log entries, turn to the next page.

102

4-4.2 Status
Show the MAC-based VLAN status.

Web Interface
To Display MAC-based address VLAN configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click VLAN Management, MAC-based VLAN and Status.

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the MAC-based VLAN Membership Status.

Figure 4-4.2: The MAC-based VLAN Status

Parameter description:⚫

MAC Address :Indicates the MAC address.

⚫

VLAN ID :Indicates the VLAN ID.

⚫

Port Members :Port members of the MAC-based VLAN entry.
Buttons

Figure 5-4.2: The MAC-based VLAN Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

103

4-5 Protocol-based VLAN
This section describe Protocol -based VLAN, The Switch support Protocol include Ethernet LLC
SNAP Protocol,
LLC
The Logical Link Control (LLC) data communication protocol layer is the upper sub-layer of theData Link Layer (which is itself layer 2, just above the Physical Layer) in the seven-layer OSI
reference model. It provides multiplexing mechanisms that make it possible for several network
protocols (IP, IPX, Decent and Appletalk) to coexist within a multipoint network and to betransported over the same network media, and can also provide flow control and automatic
repeat request (ARQ) error management mechanisms.
SNAP
The Subnetwork Access Protocol (SNAP) is a mechanism for multiplexing, on networks using
IEEE 802.2 LLC, more protocols than can be distinguished by the 8-bit 802.2 Service Access Point(SAP) fields. SNAP supports identifying protocols by Ethernet type field values; it also supports
vendor-private protocol identifier spaces. It is used with IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.4, IEEE 802.5, IEEE
802.11 and other IEEE 802 physical network layers, as well as with non-IEEE 802 physical network
layers such as FDDI that use 802.2 LLC.

4-5.1 Protocol to Group
This page allows you to add new protocols to Group Name (unique for each Group) mapping
entries as well as allow you to see and delete already mapped entries for the selected stackswitch unit switch.

Web Interface
To configure Protocol -based VLAN configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click VLAN Management, Protocol-based VLAN and Protocol to Group.

2.

Click “Add New Entry”.

3.

Specify the Frame Type, Value and Group Name.

4.

Click Apply.

104

Figure 4-5.1: The Protocol to Group Mapping Table

Parameter description:⚫

Frame Type :Frame Type can have one of the following values:
1.
2.
3.

Ethernet
LLC
SNAP
NOTE: On changing the Frame type field, valid value of the following
text field will vary depending on the new frame type you selected.

⚫

Value :
Valid value that can be entered in this text field depends on the option selected from the thepreceding Frame Type selection menu.
Below is the criteria for three different Frame Types:
1.
2.

3.

For Ethernet: Values in the text field when Ethernet is selected as a Frame Type iscalled etype. Valid values for etype ranges from 0x0600-0xffff
For LLC: Valid value in this case is comprised of two different sub-values.
a. DSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)
b. SSAP: 1-byte long string (0x00-0xff)
For SNAP: Valid value in this case also is comprised of two different sub-values.
a.OUI: OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) is value in format of xx-xx-xx where
each pair (xx) in string is a hexadecimal value ranges from 0x00-0xff.
b. PID: If the OUI is hexadecimal 000000, the protocol ID is the Ethernet type
(EtherType) field value for the protocol running on top of SNAP; if the OUI is an OUI
for a particular organization, the protocol ID is a value assigned by that organization
to the protocol running on top of SNAP.

105

⚫

Group Name :A valid Group Name is a unique 16-character long string.
Buttons⚫

Delete :To delete a Protocol to Group Name map entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted on
the switch during the next Save.

⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add a new entry in mapping table. An empty row is added to the table; Frame Type,
Value and the Group Name can be configured as needed.
The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

1064-5.2 Group to VLAN
This section allows you to map an already configured Group Name to a VLAN for the selected
stack switch unit switch.

Web Interface
To configure Group Name to VLAN mapping table configured in the web interface:
1.

Click VLAN Management, Protocol-based VLAN and Group to VLAN.

2.

Click “Add New Entry”.

3.

Specify the Group Name and VLAN ID.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 4-5.2: The Group Name of VLAN Mapping Table

Parameter description:⚫

Group Name :A valid Group Name is a string of almost 16 characters.

⚫

VLAN ID :Indicates the ID to which Group Name will be mapped. A valid VLAN ID ranges from 1-4095.

⚫

Port Members :A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each Group Name to VLAN ID mapping.
To include a port in a mapping, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from themapping, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes
are unchecked.
Buttons⚫

Delete :To delete a Group Name to VLAN map entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted on the107switch during the next Save⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add a new entry in mapping table. An empty row is added to the table, the Group
Name, VLAN ID and port members can be configured as needed. Legal values for a VLAN ID
are 1 through 4095. The button can be used to undo the addition of new entry.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

Figure 4-5.2: The Group to VLAN buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

108

4-6 IP Subnet-based VLAN
The IP subnet-based VLAN entries can be configured here. This page allows for adding,
updating and deleting IP subnet-based VLAN entries.

Web Interface
To configure IP subnet-based VLAN Membership to configured in the web interface:
1.

Click VLAN Management and IP Subnet-based VLAN.

2.

Click “Add New Entry”.

3.

Specify IP Address, Mask Length, VLAN ID.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 4-6: IP Subnet-based VLAN Membership Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

IP Address :Indicates the IP address.

⚫

Mask Length :Indicates the network mask length.

⚫

VLAN ID :Indicates the VLAN ID. VLAN ID can be changed for the existing entries.

⚫

Port Members :A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each IP subnet to VLAN ID mapping entry.
To include a port in a mapping, simply check the box. To remove or exclude the port fromthe mapping, make sure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members and allboxes are unchecked.
Buttons⚫

Delete :To delete a IP subnet-based VLAN entry, check this box and press save. The entry will bedeleted on the selected switch in the stack.
109

⚫

Add New Entry :Click “Add New Entry” to add a new IP subnet-based VLAN entry. An empty row is added
to the table, and the IP subnet-based VLAN entry can be configured as needed. Any IP
address/mask can be configured for the IP subnet-based VLAN entry. Legal values for a
VLAN ID are 1 through 4095.
The IP subnet-based VLAN entry is enabled on the selected stack switch unit when you
click on "Save". The “Delete” button can be used to undo the addition of new IP subnetbased VLANs. The maximum possible IP subnet-based VLAN entries are limited to 128.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

1104-7 GVRPThe Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP) provides a generic framework whereby
devices in a bridged LAN, e.g. end stations and switches, can register and de-register attributevalues, such as VLAN Identifiers, with each other. In doing so, the attributes are propagated todevices in the bridged LAN, and these devices form a ¡°reachability¡± tree that is a subset ofan active topology. GARP defines the architecture, rules of operation, state machines andvariables for the registration and de-registration of attribute values.
A GARP participation in a switch or an end station consists of a GARP application component,
and a GARP Information Declaration (GID) component associated with each port or the switch.
The propagation of information between GARP participants for the same application in a
bridge is carried out by the GARP Information Propagation (GIP) component. Protocol
exchanges take place between GARP participants by means of LLC Type 1 services, using thegroup MAC address and PDU format defined for the GARP application concerned.

Web Interface
To configure the GVRP in the web interface:
1.

Click VLAN Management and GVRP.

2.

Evoke to enable or disable the GVRP.

3.

Specify Join-time, Leave-time, Leave All-time, Max VLANs.

4.

Evoke to enable or disable the Mode.

5.

Click apply to save the setting.

6.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

Figure 4-7: The GVRP Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Enable GVRP globally :111

The GVRP feature is enabled by setting the check mark in the checkbox named Enable GVRP.

⚫

GVRP protocol timers :Join-time is a value in the range 1-20 in the units of centi seconds, i.e. in units of one
hundredth of a second. The default is 20.
Leave-time is a value in the range 60-300 in the units of centi seconds, i.e. in units of one
hundredth of a second. The default is 60.
Leave All-time is a value in the range 1000-5000 in the units of centi seconds, i.e. in units of
one hundredth of a second. The default is 1000.

⚫

Max VLANs :When GVRP is enabled a maximum number of VLANs supported by GVRP is specified. By
default this number is 20. This number can only be changed when GVRP is turned off.

⚫

Port :The Port column shows the list of ports.

⚫

Mode :
This configuration is to enable/disable GVRP Mode on particular port locally.
Disable: Select to Disable GVRP mode on this port.
GVRP Enable: Select to Enable GVRP mode on this port.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

1124-8 Private VLAN
The Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch can be monitored and modified
here. Private VLANs can be added or deleted here. Port members of each Private VLAN canbe added or removed here.
Private VLANs are based on the source port mask, and there are no connections to VLANs.
This means that VLAN IDs and Private VLAN IDs can be identical.
A port must be a member of both a VLAN and a Private VLAN to be able to forward packets.
By default, all ports are VLAN unaware and members of VLAN 1 and Private VLAN 1.
A VLAN unaware port can only be a member of one VLAN, but it can be a member ofmultiple Private VLANs.
VLAN Priority : Voice VLAN > MAC based VLAN > Protocol based VLAN > Tag based VLAN

Web Interface
To configure Port Isolation configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click VLAN Management and Private VLAN.

2.

Configure the Private VLAN membership configurations for the switch.

3.

Click Apply.

Figure 4-8: The Private VLAN Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Delete :To delete a private VLAN entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted during the next
apply.

⚫

Private VLAN ID :Indicates the ID of this particular private VLAN.

⚫

Port Members :A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each private VLAN ID. To include a port
in a Private VLAN, check the box. To remove or exclude the port from the Private VLAN, makesure the box is unchecked. By default, no ports are members, and all boxes are unchecked.

⚫

Add New Private VLAN :Click to add a new private VLAN ID. An empty row is added to the table, and the private
VLAN can be configured as needed. The allowed range for a private VLAN ID is the same as
the switch port number range. Any values outside this range are not accepted, and a warning
message appears. Click "OK" to discard the incorrect entry, or click "Cancel" to return to theediting and make a correction.
The Private VLAN is enabled when you click "Apply".
113

The button can be used to undo the addition of new Private VLANs.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

1144-9 Port Isolation
Port Isolation provides for an apparatus and method to isolate ports on layer 2 switches on
the same VLAN to restrict traffic flow. The apparatus comprises a switch having said pluralityof ports, each port configured as a protected port or a non-protected port. An address table
memory stores an address table having a destination address and port number pair. A
forwarding map generator generates a forwarding map which is responsive to a destination
address of a data packet. The method for isolating ports on a layer 2 switch comprises
configuring each of the ports on the layer 2 switch as a protected port or a non-protected
port. A destination address on a data packet is matched with a physical address on said layer
2 switch and a forwarding map is generated for the data packet based upon the destination
address on the data packet. The data packet is then sent to the plurality of ports pursuant to
the forwarding map generated based upon whether the ingress port was configured as aprotected or non-protected port.
This page is used for enabling or disabling port isolation on ports in a Private VLAN.A port
member of a VLAN can be isolated to other isolated ports on the same VLAN and Private VLAN.

Web Interface
To configure Port Isolation configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click VLAN Management and Port Isolation.

2.

Evoke which port want to enable Port Isolation

3.

Click Apply.

Figure 4-9: The Port Isolation Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Port Numbers :A check box is provided for each port of a private VLAN. When checked, port isolation isenabled on that port. When unchecked, port isolation is disabled on that port. By default,
port isolation is disabled on all ports.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

1154-10 Voice VLAN
Voice VLAN is VLAN configured specially for voice traffic. By adding the ports with voicedevices attached to voice VLAN, we can perform QoS-related configuration for voice data,
ensuring the transmission priority of voice traffic and voice quality.

4-10.1 Configuration
The Voice VLAN feature enables voice traffic forwarding on the Voice VLAN, then the switch canclassify and schedule network traffic. It is recommended that there be two VLANs on a port one for voice, one for data. Before connecting the IP device to the switch, the IP phone should
configure the voice VLAN ID correctly. It should be configured through its own GUI.

Web Interface
To configure Voice VLAN in the web interface:
1.

Click VLAN Management, Voice VLAN and Configuration.

2.

Select “on” in the Voice VLAN Configuration.

3.

Specify VLAN ID, Aging Time and Traffic Class.

4.

Select Port Members in the Voice VLAN Configuration.

5.

Specify ( Mode, Security, Discovery Protocol) in the Port Configuration.

6.

Click the Apply to save the setting.

7.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

Figure 4-10.1: The Voice VLAN Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Mode :
Indicates the Voice VLAN mode operation. We must disable MSTP feature before we enable
Voice VLAN. It can avoid the conflict of ingress filtering. Possible modes are:on: Enable Voice VLAN mode operation.
116

off: Disable Voice VLAN mode operation.
⚫

VLAN ID :Indicates the Voice VLAN ID. It should be a unique VLAN ID in the system and cannot equal
each port PVID. It is a conflict in configuration if the value equals management VID, MVR VID,
PVID etc. The allowed range is 1 to 4095.

⚫

Aging Time :Indicates the Voice VLAN secure learning aging time. The allowed range is 10 to 10000000
seconds. It is used when security mode or auto detect mode is enabled. In other cases, it will
be based on hardware aging time. The actual aging time will be situated between the[age_time; 2 * age_time] interval.

⚫

Traffic :Indicates the Voice VLAN traffic class. All traffic on the Voice VLAN will apply this class.

⚫

Port :The switch port number of the Voice VLAN port.

⚫

Port Mode :Indicates the Voice VLAN port mode. Possible port modes are:
Disabled: Disjoin from Voice VLAN.
Auto: Enable auto detect mode. It detects whether there is VoIP phone attached to thespecific port and configures the Voice VLAN members automatically.
Forced: Force join to Voice VLAN.
This field will be read only if STP feature is enabled. And the STP port mode will be readonly
if this field be set to the mode other than Disabled.

⚫

Port Security :Indicates the Voice VLAN port security mode. When the function is enabled, all nontelephonic MAC addresses in the Voice VLAN will be blocked for 10 seconds. Possible portmodes are:Enabled: Enable Voice VLAN security mode operation.
Disabled: Disable Voice VLAN security mode operation.

⚫

Port Discovery Protocol
Indicates the Voice VLAN port discovery protocol. It will only work when auto detect modeis enabled. We should enable LLDP feature before configuring discovery protocol to "LLDP"or "Both". Changing the discovery protocol to "OUI" or "LLDP" will restart auto detect process.
Possible discovery protocols are:
OUI: Detect telephony device by OUI address.
LLDP: Detect telephony device by LLDP.
Both: Both OUI and LLDP.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

1174-10.2 OUIThe section describes to Configure VOICE VLAN OUI table. The maximum entry number is 16.
Modifying the OUI table will restart auto detection of OUI process.

Web Interface
To configure Voice VLAN OUI Table in the web interface:
1.

Click VLAN Management, Voice VLAN and OUI

2.

Select “Add new entry”, “delete” in the Voice VLAN OUI table.

3.

Specify Telephony OUI, Description.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 4-10.2: The Voice VLAN OUI Table

Parameter description:⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

Telephony OUI :A telephony OUI address is a globally unique identifier assigned to a vendor by IEEE. It mustbe 6 characters long and the input format is "xx-xx-xx" (x is a hexadecimal digit).

⚫

Description :The description of OUI address. Normally, it describes which vendor telephony device it
belongs to. The allowed string length is 0 to 32.

⚫

Add New entry :Click to add a new entry in Voice VLAN OUI table. An empty row is added to the table, theTelephony OUI, Description.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
118

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

119Chapter 5

Quality of Service

The switch support four QoS queues per port with strict or weighted fair queuing scheduling. It
supports QoS Control Lists (QCL) for advance programmable QoS classification, based on IEEE
802.1p, Ethertype, VID, IPv4/IPv6 DSCP and UDP/TCP ports and ranges.
High flexibility in the classification of incoming frames to a QoS class. The QoS classification
looks for information up to Layer 4, including IPv4 and IPv6 DSCP, IPv4 TCP/UDP port numbers,
and user priority of tagged frames. This QoS classification mechanism is implemented in a QoS
control list (QCL). The QoS class assigned to a frame is used throughout the device for providing
queuing, scheduling, and congestion control guarantees to the frame according to what was
configured for that specific QoS class.
The switch support advanced memory control mechanisms providing excellent performance of
all QoS classes under any traffic scenario, including jumbo frame. A super priority queue withdedicated memory and strict highest priority in the arbitration. The ingress super priority queue
allows traffic recognized as CPU traffic to be received and queued for transmission to the CPU
even when all the QoS class queues are congested.

5-1 Port Classification
The section allows you to configure the basic QoS Ingress Classification settings for all switch
ports.

Web Interface
To configure the QoS Ingress Port Classification parameters in the web interface:
1.

Click Quality of Service and Port Classification.

2.

Scroll to select QoS Ingress Port parameters.

3.

Click the Apply to save the setting.

4.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

5.

Click “PCP Classification “to next page “Port PCP Classification”.

Figure 5-1: The QoS Ingress Port Classification

120

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The port number for which the configuration below applies.

⚫

Queue Priority :Controls the default CoS value.
All frames are classified to a CoS. There is a one to one mapping between CoS, queue andpriority. A CoS of 0 (zero) has the lowest priority.
If the port is VLAN aware, the frame is tagged and Tag Class. is enabled, then the frame isclassified to a CoS that is mapped from the PCP and DEI value in the tag. Otherwise the frame
is classified to the default CoS.
The classified CoS can be overruled by a QCL entry.
Note: If the default CoS has been dynamically changed, then the actual default CoS is shownin parentheses after the configured default CoS.

⚫

DPL :
Controls the default drop precedence level.
All frames are classified to a drop precedence level.
If the port is VLAN aware, the frame is tagged and Tag Class. is enabled, then the frame isclassified to a DPL that is mapped from the PCP and DEI value in the tag. Otherwise the frame
is classified to the default DPL.
The classified DPL can be overruled by a QCL entry.

⚫

PCP :
Controls the default PCP value.
All frames are classified to a PCP value.
If the port is VLAN aware and the frame is tagged, then the frame is classified to the PCPvalue in the tag. Otherwise the frame is classified to the default PCP value.

⚫

DEI :
Controls the default DEI value.
All frames are classified to a DEI value.
If the port is VLAN aware and the frame is tagged, then the frame is classified to the DEI
value in the tag. Otherwise the frame is classified to the default DEI value.

⚫

DSCP Based :Click to Enable DSCP Based QoS Ingress Port Classification.

⚫

WRED Group :Controls the WRED group membership.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

⚫

PCP Classification :121

Shows the classification mode for tagged frames on this port.
Disabled: Use default CoS and DPL for tagged frames.
Enabled: Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames.
Click on the mode in order to configure the mode and/or mapping.
Note: This setting has no effect if the port is VLAN unaware. Tagged frames received on VLAN
unaware ports are always classified to the default CoS and DPL.

Figure 5-1: The Port PCP Classification

Parameter description:⚫

PCP Classification
Controls the classification mode for tagged frames on this port.
Disabled: Use default CoS and DPL for tagged frames.
Enabled: Use mapped versions of PCP and DEI for tagged frames.

⚫

(PCP, DEI) to (Queue Priority, DPL level) Mapping
Controls the mapping of the classified (PCP, DEI) to (Queue Priority, DPL level) values when
Tag Classification is set to Enabled.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

⚫

Cancel :Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the previous page.

122

5-2 Port Policers
This section provides an overview of QoS Ingress Port Policers for all switch ports The Port
Policing is useful in constraining traffic flows and marking frames above specific rates. Policing
is primarily useful for data flows and voice or video flows because voice and video usually
maintains a steady rate of traffic

Web Interface
To configure the QoS Port Policers in the web interface:
1.

Click Quality of Service and Port Policers.

2.

Click which port need to enable the QoS Ingress Port Policers, and configue the Rate
limit condition.

3.

Scroll to select the column Rate and Unit.

4.

Click Apply to save the configuration.

5.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert
to previously saved values.

Figure 5-2: The QoS Ingress Port Policers Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The logical port for the settings contained in the same row. Click on the port number in order
to configure the schedulers.

⚫

Enabled :To evoke which Port you need to enable the QoS Ingress Port Policers function.

⚫

Rate :To set the Rate limit value for this port, the default is 1000000.

⚫

Unit :
Controls the unit of measure for the port policer rate as kbps, Mbps, fps or kfps.

⚫

Flow Control :If flow control is enabled and the port is in flow control mode, then pause frames are sent
instead of discarding frames.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.
123⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

1245-3 Port Shapers
This section provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Shapers for all switch ports. Others theuser could get all detail information of the ports belong to the currently selected stack unit, as
reflected by the page header.

Web Interface
To configure the QoS Port Shapers in the web interface:
1.

Click Quality of Service and Port Shapers.

2.

Click the Port and display the Qos Egress Port Shapers.

3.

Scroll the Port and Scheduler Mode and specify the Queue Shaper parameter.

4.

Click the Apply to save the setting.

5.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert
to previously saved values.

Figure 5-3: The QoS Egress Port Shaper

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Click on the port number in order to configure the shapers.

⚫

Shapers – Qn :Shows disabled or actual queue shaper rate - e.g. "800 Mbps".

⚫

Shapers – Port :Shows disabled or actual port shaper rate - e.g. "800 Mbps".

⚫

Scheduler Mode :Controls how many of the queues are scheduled as strict and how many are scheduled asweighted on this switch port.
125

⚫

Queue Shaper Enable :Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port.

⚫

Queue Shaper Rate :Controls the rate for the queue shaper. This value is restricted to 100-13107100 when "Unit"
is kbps, and 1-13107 when "Unit" is Mbps.The rate is internally rounded up to the nearest
value supported by the queue shaper.

⚫

Queue Shaper Unit :Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps.

⚫

Queue Shaper Rate-type :The rate type of the queue shaper. The allowed values are:Line: Specify that this shaper operates on line rate.
Data: Specify that this shaper operates on data rate.

⚫

Queue Scheduler Weight :Controls the weight for this queue. This value is restricted to 1-100. This parameter is only
shown if "Scheduler Mode" is set to "Weighted".

⚫

Queue Scheduler Percent :Shows the weight in percent for this queue. This parameter is only shown if "Scheduler Mode"is set to "Weighted".

⚫

Port Shaper Enable :Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port.

⚫

Port Shaper Rate :Controls the rate for the port shaper. This value is restricted to 100-13107100 when "Unit"
is kbps, and 1-13107 when "Unit" is Mbps.The rate is internally rounded up to the nearest
value supported by the port shaper.

⚫

Port Shaper Unit :Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps.

⚫

Port Shaper Rate-type :The rate type of the port shaper. The allowed values are:Line: Specify that this shaper operates on line rate.
Data: Specify that this shaper operates on data rate.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

1265-4 Storm Control
The section allows user to configure the Storm control for the switch. There is a destination
lookup failure storm rate control, multicast storm rate control, and a broadcast storm rate
control. These only affect flooded frames, i.e. frames with a (VLAN ID, DMAC) pair not present
on the MAC Address table. The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast,multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch

Web Interface
To configure the Storm Control Configuration parameters in the web interface:
1.

Click Quality of Service and Storm Control.

2.

Evoke to select the frame type to enable storm control.

3.

Scroll to set the Rate Parameters and Unit.

4.

Click which port need to enable, and configure the Rate limit condition.

5.

Click the Apply to save the setting.

6.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

Figure 5-4: The Storm Control Configuration

Parameter description:
Global Storm Policer Configuration
Global storm policers for the switch are configured on this page.
There is a unicast storm policer, multicast storm policer, and a broadcast storm policer.
These only affect flooded frames, i.e. frames with a (VLAN ID, DMAC) pair not present in the
MAC Address table.
⚫

Frame Type :The frame type for which the configuration below applies.

⚫

Enable :127

Enable or disable the global storm policer for the given frame type.
⚫

Rate :
Controls the rate for the global storm policer. This value is restricted to 10-13128147 when
"Unit" is fps or kbps, and 1-13128 when "Unit" is kfps or Mbps. The rate is internally rounded
up to the nearest value supported by the global storm policer. Supported rates are divisibleby 10 fps or 25 kbps.

⚫

Unit :
Controls the unit of measure for the global storm policer rate as fps, kfps, kbps or Mbps.
Port Storm Policer Configuration Help
Port storm policers for all switch ports are configured on this page.
There is a storm policer for known and unknown unicast frames, known and unknown
broadcast frames and unknown (flooded) unicast, multicast and broadcast frames.

⚫

Port :The port number for which the configuration below applies.

⚫

Enable :Enable or disable the storm policer for this switch port.

⚫

Rate :
Controls the rate for the port storm policer. This value is restricted to 10-13128147 when
"Unit" is fps or kbps, and 1-13128 when "Unit" is kfps or Mbps. The rate is internally rounded
up to the nearest value supported by the port storm policer. Supported rates are divisible by
10 fps or 25 kbps.

⚫

Unit :
Controls the unit of measure for the port storm policer rate as fps, kfps, kbps or Mbps.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

1285-5 Port Scheduler
This section provides an overview of QoS Egress Port Scheduler for all switch ports. and theports belong to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.

Web Interface
To configure the QoS Port Schedulers in the web interface:
1.

Click Quality of Service and Port Scheduler.

2.

Click the Port and display the QoS Egress Port Schedulers

3.

Scroll Port and Scheduler Mode, specify the Queue Shaper parameter.

4.

Click the Apply to save the setting.

5.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert
to previously saved values.

Figure 5-5: The QoS Egress Port Schedules

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

⚫

Mode
Shows the scheduling mode for this port.

⚫

Qn
Shows the weight for this queue and port.

⚫

Scheduler ModeControls how many of the queues are scheduled as strict and how many are scheduled asweighted on this switch port.

⚫

Queue Shaper Enable
Controls whether the queue shaper is enabled for this queue on this switch port.

⚫

Queue Shaper Rate
Controls the rate for the queue shaper. This value is restricted to 100-13107100 when "Unit"
is kbps, and 1-13107 when "Unit" is Mbps.The rate is internally rounded up to the nearest
value supported by the queue shaper.

⚫

Queue Shaper Unit
129

Controls the unit of measure for the queue shaper rate as kbps or Mbps.
⚫

Queue Shaper Rate-type
The rate type of the queue shaper. The allowed values are:Line: Specify that this shaper operates on line rate.
Data: Specify that this shaper operates on data rate.

⚫

Queue Scheduler WeightControls the weight for this queue. This value is restricted to 1-100. This parameter is only
shown if "Scheduler Mode" is set to "Weighted".

⚫

Queue Scheduler Percent
Shows the weight in percent for this queue. This parameter is only shown if "Scheduler Mode"is set to "Weighted".

⚫

Port Shaper Enable
Controls whether the port shaper is enabled for this switch port.

⚫

Port Shaper Rate
Controls the rate for the port shaper. This value is restricted to 100-13107100 when "Unit"
is kbps, and 1-13107 when "Unit" is Mbps.The rate is internally rounded up to the nearest
value supported by the port shaper.

⚫

Port Shaper Unit
Controls the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps.

⚫

Port Shaper Rate-type
The rate type of the port shaper. The allowed values are:Line: Specify that this shaper operates on line rate.
Data: Specify that this shaper operates on data rate.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

1305-6 Port PCP Remarking
The Section provides user to get an overview of QoS Egress Port PCP Remarking for all switch
ports. Others the ports belong to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page
header. .

Web Interface
To configure the QoS Port PCP Remarking in the web interface:
1.

Click Quality of Service and Port PCP Remarking.

2.

Click the Port and display the QoS Port PCP Remarking.

3.

Scroll the Port and PCP Remarking Mode and specify the Queue Shaper parameter.

4.

Click the Apply to save the setting.

5.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

131

Figure 5-6: The Port PCP Remarking

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.
Click on the port number in order to configure PCP remarking.

⚫

Mode :
Shows the PCP remarking mode for this port.
Keep: Use classified PCP/DEI values.
Specific: Use default PCP/DEI values.
Mapped: Use mapped versions of CoS and DPL.

⚫

PCP/DEI Configuration :Controls the default PCP and DEI values used when the mode is set to Default.

⚫

(QoS class, DP level) to (PCP, DEI) Mapping :Controls the mapping of the classified (QoS class, DP level) to (PCP, DEI) values when themode is set to Mapped.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

1325-7 DSCP
5-7.1 Port DSCPThe section will teach user to set the QoS Port DSCP configuration that was allowed you to
configure the basic QoS Port DSCP Configuration settings for all switch ports. Others thesettings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflected by the page header.

Web Interface
To configure the QoS Port DSCP parameters in the web interface:
1.

Click Quality of Service, DSCP and Port DSCP.

2.

Evoke to enable or disable the Ingress Translate and Scroll the Classify parameter.

3.

Scroll to select Egress Rewrite parameters

4.

Click the apply to save the setting

5.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values

Figure 5-7.1: The QoS Port DSCP Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The Port column shows the list of ports for which you can configure dscp ingress and egresssettings.

⚫

Ingress :In Ingress settings you can change ingress translation and classification settings for individual
ports.
There are two configuration parameters available in Ingress:
1. Translate: To Enable the Ingress Translation click the checkbox
2. Classify: Classification for a port have 4 different values
Disable: No Ingress DSCP Classification.
DSCP=0: Classify if incoming (or translated if enabled) DSCP is 0.
Selected: Classify only selected DSCP for which classification is enabled as specified in DSCP
Translation window for the specific DSCP.
All: Classify all DSCP.
133

⚫

Egress :Port Egress Rewriting can be one of below parameters
Disable: No Egress rewrite.
Enable: Rewrite enable without remapped.
Remap: DSCP from analyzer is remapped and frame is remarked with remapped DSCP value.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

1345-7.2 DSCP Translation
The section describes the switch allows you to configure the basic QoS DSCP Translation
settings for all switches. DSCP translation can be done in Ingress or Egress.

Web Interface
To configure the DSCP Translation parameters in the web interface:
1.

Click Quality of Service, DSCP and DSCP Translation.

2.

Scroll to set the Ingress Translate and Egress Remap Parameters.

3.

Evoke to enable or disable Classify.

4.

Click the apply to save the setting.

5.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

Figure 5-7.2: The DSCP Translation Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

DSCP :
Maximum number of supported DSCP values are 64 and valid DSCP value ranges from 0 to
63.

⚫

Ingress :Ingress side DSCP can be first translated to new DSCP before using the DSCP for QoS classand DPL map.
There are two configuration parameters for DSCP Translation –Translate: DSCP at Ingress side can be translated to any of (0-63) DSCP values.
Classify: Click to enable Classification at Ingress side.

⚫

Egress :Select the DSCP value from select menu to which you want to remap. DSCP value ranges
form 0 to 63.
Buttons135

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

1365-7.3 DSCP Classification
The section describes to teach user to configure and allows you to map DSCP value to a QoSClass and DPL value. Others the settings relate to the currently selected stack unit, as reflectedby the page header.

Web Interface
To configure the DSCP Classification parameters in the web interface:
1.

Click Quality of Service, DSCP and DSCP Translation

2.

Scroll to set the DSCP Parameters

3.

Click the apply to save the setting

4.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values

Figure 5-7.3: The DSCP Classification Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Queue Priority :Actual Class of Service.

⚫

DSCP DP0 :Select the classified DSCP value (0-63) for Drop Precedence Level 0.

⚫

DSCP DP1 :Select the classified DSCP value (0-63) for Drop Precedence Level 1.

⚫

DSCP DP2 :Select the classified DSCP value (0-63) for Drop Precedence Level 2.

⚫

DSCP DP3 :Select the classified DSCP value (0-63) for Drop Precedence Level 3.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
137

Click to save changes.
⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

1385-7.4 DSCP-Based QoS
The section will teach user to configure the DSCP-Based QoS mode that This page allows
you to configure the basic QoS DSCP based QoS Ingress Classification settings for all
switches.

Web Interface
To configure the DSCP –Based QoS Ingress Classification parameters in the web interface:
1.

Click Quality of Service, DSCP and DSCP-Based QoS.

2.

Evoke to enable or disable the DSCP for Trust.

3.

Scroll to select Queue Priority and DPL parameters.

4.

Click the save to save the setting.

5. If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

Figure 5-7.4: The DSCP-Based QoS Ingress Classification Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

DSCP :
Maximum number of support ed DSCP values are 64.

⚫

Trust :
Click to check if the DSCP value is trusted.

⚫

Queue Priority :Queue Priority value can be any between 0 and 7. 7 is the highest.

⚫

DPL :
Drop Precedence Level (0-3)
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
139

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

1405-8 QoS Control List
5-8.1 Configuration
The section shows the QoS Control List (QCL), which is made up of the QCEs. Each row describes
a QCE that is defined. The maximum number of QCEs is 256 on each switch. Click on the lowest
plus sign to add a new QCE to the list.

Web Interface
To configure the QoS Control List parameters in the web interface:
1.

Click Quality of Service, QoS Contol List and Configuration.

2.

Click the3.

Scroll all parameters and evoke the Port Member to join the QCE rules.

4.

Click the apply to save the setting.

5.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

to add a new QoS Control List.

141

Figure 5-8.1: The QoS Control List Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

QCE :Indicates the index of QCE.

⚫

Port :
Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE.

⚫

DMAC :
Indicates the destination MAC address. Possible values are:Any: Match any DMAC.
Unicast: Match unicast DMAC.
Multicast: Match multicast DMAC.
Broadcast: Match broadcast DMAC.
<MAC>: Match specific DMAC.
The default value is 'Any'.

⚫

SMAC :
Match specific source MAC address or 'Any'.
If a port is configured to match on DMAC/DIP, this field indicates the DMAC.

⚫

Tag Type :Indicates tag type. Possible values are:Any: Match tagged and untagged frames.
Untagged: Match untagged frames.
Tagged: Match tagged frames.
C-Tagged: Match C-tagged frames.
S-Tagged: Match S-tagged frames.
The default value is 'Any'.

⚫

VID :
Indicates (VLAN ID), either a specific VID or range of VIDs. VID can be in the range 1-4095
or 'Any'⚫

PCP :Priority Code Point: Valid values of PCP are specific (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) or range(0-1, 2-3, 45, 6-7, 0-3, 4-7) or 'Any'.

⚫

DEI :
142

Drop Eligible Indicator: Valid value of DEI are 0, 1 or 'Any'.
⚫

Frame Type :Indicates the type of frame to look for incoming frames. Possible frame types are:Any: The QCE will match all frame type.
Ethernet: Only Ethernet frames (with Ether Type 0x600-0xFFFF) are allowed.
LLC: Only (LLC) frames are allowed.
SNAP: Only (SNAP) frames are allowed
IPv4: The QCE will match only IPV4 frames.
IPv6: The QCE will match only IPV6 frames.

⚫

Action :Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured arematched with the frame's content.
Possible actions are:
CoS: Classify Class of Service.
DPL: Classify Drop Precedence Level.
DSCP: Classify DSCP value.
PCP: Classify PCP value.
DEI: Classify DEI value.
Policy: Classify ACL Policy number.

⚫

Modification Buttons :You can modify each QCE (QoS Control Entry) in the table using the following buttons:: Inserts a new QCE before the current row.

: Edits the QCE.
: Moves the QCE up the list.
: Moves the QCE down the list.
: Deletes the QCE.
: The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the QCE listings.
⚫

Port Members :Check the checkbox button to include the port in the QCL entry. By default all ports areincluded.

⚫

Key Parameters :Key configuration is described as below:
DMAC Destination MAC address: Possible values are 'Unicast', 'Multicast', 'Broadcast','Specific' (xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx) or 'Any'.
SMAC Source MAC address: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx or 'Any'.
Tag Value of Tag field can be 'Untagged', 'Tagged', 'C-Tagged', 'S-Tagged' or 'Any'.
VID Valid value of VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1-4095 or 'Any'; user can enter
either a specific value or a range of VIDs.
PCP Valid value PCP are specific (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) or range (0-1, 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, 0-3, 4-7) or'Any'.
DEI Valid value of DEI can be '0', '1' or 'Any'.
Inner Tag Value of Inner Tag field can be 'Untagged', 'Tagged', 'C-Tagged', 'S-Tagged' or'Any'.
143

Inner VID Valid value of Inner VLAN ID can be any value in the range 1-4095 or 'Any'; user
can enter either a specific value or a range of VIDs.
Inner PCP Valid value of Inner PCP are specific (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) or range (0-1, 2-3, 4-5, 67, 0-3, 4-7) or 'Any'.
Inner DEI Valid value of Inner DEI can be '0', '1' or 'Any'.
Frame Type Frame Type can have any of the following values:
Any
EtherType
LLC
SNAP
IPv4
IPv6
Note: All frame types are explained below.
⚫

Any :Allow all types of frames.

⚫

EtherType :Ether Type Valid Ether Type can be 0x600-0xFFFF excluding 0x800(IPv4) and 0x86DD(IPv6)
or 'Any'.

⚫

LLC :DSAP Address Valid DSAP(Destination Service Access Point) can vary from 0x00 to 0xFF or'Any'.
SSAP Address Valid SSAP(Source Service Access Point) can vary from 0x00 to 0xFF or 'Any'.
Control Valid Control field can vary from 0x00 to 0xFF or 'Any'.

⚫

SNAP :PID Valid PID(a.k.a Ether Type) can be 0x0000-0xFFFF or 'Any'.

⚫

IPv4 :
Protocol IP protocol number: (0-255, 'TCP' or 'UDP') or 'Any'.
Source IP Specific Source IP address in value/mask format or 'Any'. IP and Mask are in theformat x.y.z.w where x, y, z, and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255. When Mask isconverted to a 32-bit binary string and read from left to right, all bits following the first zeromust also be zero.
Destination IP Specific Destination IP address in value/mask format or 'Any'.
IP Fragment IPv4 frame fragmented option: 'Yes', 'No' or 'Any'.
DSCP Diffserv Code Point value (DSCP): It can be a specific value, range of values or 'Any'.
DSCP values are in the range 0-63 including BE, CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43.
Sport Source TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port range applicable for IP
protocol UDP/TCP.
Dport Destination TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port range applicable for IP
protocol UDP/TCP.

⚫

IPv6 :
Protocol IP protocol number: (0-255, 'TCP' or 'UDP') or 'Any'.
Source IP 32 LS bits of IPv6 source address in value/mask format or 'Any'.
Destination IP Specific Destination IP address in value/mask format or 'Any'.
DSCP Diffserv Code Point value (DSCP): It can be a specific value, range of values or 'Any'.
DSCP values are in the range 0-63 including BE, CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43.
Sport Source TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port range applicable for IP
protocol UDP/TCP.
144

Dport Destination TCP/UDP port:(0-65535) or 'Any', specific or port range applicable for IP
protocol UDP/TCP.
⚫

Action Parameters :CoS Class of Service: (0-7) or 'Default'.
DPL Drop Precedence Level: (0-3) or 'Default'.
DSCP DSCP: (0-63, BE, CS1-CS7, EF or AF11-AF43) or 'Default'.
PCP PCP: (0-7) or 'Default'. Note: PCP and DEI cannot be set individually.
DEI DEI: (0-1) or 'Default'.
Policy ACL Policy number: (0-127) or 'Default' (empty field).
'Default' means that the default classified value is not modified by this QCE.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

⚫

Cancel :Return to the previous page without saving the configuration change.

145

5-8.2 Status
The section will let you know how to configure and shows the QCL status
by different QCL users. Each row describes the QCE that is defined. It is a conflict if a specific
QCE is not applied to the hardware due to hardware limitations. The maximum number of
QCEs is 256 on each switch.

Web Interface
To display the QoS Control List Status in the web interface:
1.

Click Quality of Service, QoS Contol List and Status.

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Scroll to select the combined, static, Voice VLAN and conflict.

4.

To click the “Refresh” to refresh an entry of the MVR Statistics Information.

Figure 5-8.2: The QoS Control List Status

Parameter description:⚫

User :
Indicates the QCL user.

⚫

QCE :
Indicates the index of QCE.

⚫

Port :
Indicates the list of ports configured with the QCE.

⚫

Frame Type :Indicates the type of frame. Possible values are:Any: Match any frame type.
Ethernet: Match EtherType frames.
LLC: Match (LLC) frames.
SNAP: Match (SNAP) frames.
IPv4: Match IPv4 frames.
IPv6: Match IPv6 frames.

⚫

Action :Indicates the classification action taken on ingress frame if parameters configured arematched with the frame's content.
Possible actions are:
CoS: Classify Class of Service.
DPL: Classify Drop Precedence Level.
DSCP: Classify DSCP value.
146

PCP: Classify PCP value.
DEI: Classify DEI value.
Policy: Classify ACL Policy number.
Ingress Map: Classify Ingress Map ID.
⚫

Conflict :Displays Conflict status of QCL entries. It may happen that resources required to add a QCE
may not available, in that case it shows conflict status as 'Yes', otherwise it is always 'No’.
Please note that conflict can be resolved by releasing the H/W resources required to add
QCL entry on pressing 'Resolve Conflict' button.
Buttons

Figure 5-8.2: The QoS Control List Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

Combined :Select the QCL status from this drop down list.

⚫

Resolve Conflict :Click to release the resources required to add QCL entry, in case the conflict status for any
QCL entry is 'yes'.

147

5-9 Qos Statistics
This page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports.

Web Interface
To Display the Queuing Counters in the web interface:
1.

Click Quality of Service and QoS Statistics

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the Queuing Counters or clear all information when you click“Clear”.

Figure 5-9: The Queuing Counters Overview

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

⚫

Qn :Qn is the Queue number, There are 8 QoS queues per port. Q0 is the lowest priority queue.

⚫

Rx/Tx :The number of received and transmitted packets per queue.
Buttons

Figure 5-9: The Queuing Counters buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page.

⚫

Clear :
Click to clear the page.

148

5-10 WREDThis page allows you to configure the Random Early Detection (RED) settings. Through different RED
configuration for the queues it is possible to obtain Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED)
operation between queues.The settings are global for all ports in the switch.

Web Interface
To configure and display the Random Early Detection in the web interface:
1.

Click Quality of Service and WRED.

2.

Scroll all parameters and evoke the Weighted Random Early Detection Configuration.

3.

Click the apply to save the setting.

4.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

Figure 5-10: The Weighted Random Early Detection Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

⚫

Group
The WRED group number for which the configuration below applies.

⚫

Queue
The queue number (CoS) for which the configuration below applies.

⚫

DPL
The Drop Precedence Level for which the configuration below applies.

⚫

EnableControls whether RED is enabled for this entry.

⚫

Min
Controls the lower RED fill level threshold. If the queue filling level is below this threshold,the drop probability is zero. This value is restricted to 0-100%.

⚫

Max
Controls the upper RED drop probability or fill level threshold for frames marked with Drop
Precedence Level > 0 (yellow frames). This value is restricted to 1-100%.
149

⚫

Max Unit
Selects the unit for Max. Possible values are:Drop Probability: Max controls the drop probability just below 100% fill level.
Fill Level: Max controls the fill level where drop probability reaches 100%.

RED Drop Probability Function
The following illustration shows the drop probability versus fill level function with associatedparameters.

Min is the fill level where the queue randomly start dropping frames marked with Drop
Precedence Level > 0 (yellow frames).
If Max Unit is 'Drop Probability' (the green line), Max controls the drop probability when thefill level is just below 100%.
If Max Unit is 'Fill Level' (the red line), Max controls the fill level where drop probability
reaches 100%. This configuration makes it possible to reserve a portion of the queue
exclusively for frames marked with Drop Precedence Level 0 (green frames). The reserved
portion is calculated as (100 - Max) %.
Frames marked with Drop Precedence Level 0 (green frames) are never dropped.
The drop probability for frames increases linearly from zero (at Min average queue fillinglevel) to Max Drop Probability or Fill Level.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page.

150

Chapter 6

Spanning tree

The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) can be used to detect and disable network loops, and toprovide backup links between switches, bridges or routers. This allows the switch to interact
with other bridging devices (that is, an STP-compliant switch, bridge or router) in yournetwork to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on the network, andprovide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down.
STP - STP uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device (STP- compliant switch, bridgeor router) that serves as the root of the spanning tree network. It selects a root port on eachbridging device (except for the root device) which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding
a packet from that device to the root device. Then it selects a designated bridging device fromeach LAN which incurs the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to theroot device. All ports connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designatedports. After determining the lowest cost spanning tree, it enables all root ports and designatedports, and disables all other ports. Network packets are therefore only forwarded between root
ports and designated ports, eliminating any possible network loops.

Figure 7: The Spanning Tree Protocol

Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello BPDUs (Bridge
Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the Root Bridge. If a bridge does not get a Hello BPDU
after a predefined interval (Maximum Age), the bridge assumes that the link to the Root Bridge
is down. This bridge will then initiate negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network
to reestablish a valid network topology.

6-1 STP Configuration
The section describes that you can select enable spanning tree protocol or not, and you canselect what protocol version you want.

Web Interface
To configure the Spanning Tree Protocol version in the web interface:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Click Spanning Tree and STP Configuration.
Scroll to select the parameters and write down available value of parameters in blank fieldin Basic Settings.
Evoke to enable or disable the parameters and write down available value of parameters inblank field in Advanced settings.
Click the apply to save the setting.
151

5.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

Figure 6-1: The STP Configuration

Parameter description:
Basic Settings⚫

Protocol Version :The MSTP / RSTP / STP protocol version setting. Valid values are STP, RSTP and MSTP.

⚫

Bridge Priority :Controls the bridge priority. Lower numeric values have better priority. The bridge priority
plus the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte MAC address of the switch
forms a Bridge Identifier. For MSTP operation, this is the priority of the CIST. Otherwise, thisis the priority of the STP/RSTP Bridge.

⚫

Hello Time :The interval between sending STP BPDU's. Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 seconds,
default is 2 seconds.
Note: Changing this parameter from the default value is not recommended, and may haveadverse effects on your network.

⚫

Forward Delay :The delay used by STP Bridges to transit Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding (used in
STP compatible mode). Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds.
152

⚫

Max Age :The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge.
Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 seconds, and MaxAge must be <= (FwdDelay-1)*2.

⚫

Maximum Hop Count :This defines the initial value of remaining Hops for MSTI information generated at theboundary of an MSTI region. It defines how many bridges a root bridge can distribute its
BPDU information to. Valid values are in the range 6 to 40 hops.

⚫

Transmit Hold Count :The number of BPDU's a bridge port can send per second. When exceeded, transmission of
the next BPDU will be delayed. Valid values are in the range 1 to 10 BPDU's per second.
Advanced Settings⚫

Edge Port BPDU Filtering :Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will transmit and receive BPDUs.

⚫

Edge Port BPDU Guard :Control whether a port explicitly configured as Edge will disable itself upon reception of a
BPDU. The port will enter the error-disabled state, and will be removed from the active
topology.

⚫

Port Error Recovery :Control whether a port in the error-disabled state automatically will be enabled after a certain
time. If recovery is not enabled, ports have to be disabled and re-enabled for normal STP
operation. The condition is also cleared by a system reboot.

⚫

Port Error Recovery Timeout :The time to pass before a port in the error-disabled state can be enabled. Valid values are
between 30 and 86400 seconds (24 hours).
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

1536-2 MSTI Configuration
When you implement a Spanning Tree protocol on the switch that the bridge instance. The CIST
is not available for explicit mapping, as it will receive the VLANs not explicitly mapped. Due tothe reason that you need to set the list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI. The VLANs must be
separated with comma and/or space. A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI. An unused
MSTI should just be left empty. (I.e. not having any VLANs mapped to it.)This section describes it allows the user to inspect the current STP MSTI bridge instance priority
configurations, and possibly change them as well.

Web Interface
To configure the Spanning Tree MSTI in the web interface:
1.

Click Spanning Tree and MSTI Configuration.

2.

Specify the configuration identification parameters in the field. Specify the VLANs Mappedblank field.

3.

Click the Apply to save the setting.

4.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

5.

Click Edit to configure the STP CIST Port Configuration.

Figure 6-2: The MSTI Configuration

Parameter description:
Configuration Identification⚫

Configuration Name :154

The name identifying the VLAN to MSTI mapping. Bridges must share the name and revision(see below), as well as the VLAN-to-MSTI mapping configuration in order to share spanning
trees for MSTI's (Intra-region). The name is at most 32 characters.
⚫

Configuration Revision :The revision of the MSTI configuration named above. This must be an integer between 0 and
65535.
MSTI Mapping⚫

Instance :The bridge instance. The CIST is not available for explicit mapping, as it will receive the VLANs
not explicitly mapped.

⚫

VLANs Mapped :The list of VLANs mapped to the MSTI. The VLANs can be given as a single (xx, xx being
between 1 and 4094) VLAN, or a range (xx-yy), each of which must be separated withcomma and/or space. A VLAN can only be mapped to one MSTI. An unused MSTI should
just be left empty. (I.e. not having any VLANs mapped to it.) Example: 2,5,20-40.

⚫

MSTI Priority :Controls the bridge priority. Lower numeric values have better priority. The bridge priority
plus the MSTI instance number, concatenated with the 6-byte MAC address of the switch
forms a Bridge Identifier.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

⚫

MSTI Port :Click to configure the STP CIST Port Configuration.

155

Figure 6-2: The STP CIST Port Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The switch port number of the logical STP port.

⚫

STP Enabled :Controls whether STP is enabled on this switch port. This field will be read only if Voice VLAN
feature is enabled. The Voice VLAN port mode will be read only if this field be Enabled.

⚫

Path Cost :Controls the path cost incurred by the port. The Auto setting will set the path cost as
appropriate by the physical link speed, using the 802.1D recommended values. Using theSpecific setting, a user-defined value can be entered. The path cost is used when establishing
the active topology of the network. Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports infavor of higher path cost ports. Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000.

⚫

Priority :Controls the port priority. This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port
cost. (See above).

⚫

AdminEdge :Controls whether the operEdge flag should start as set or cleared. (The initial operEdge state
when a port is initialized).

⚫

AutoEdge :Controls whether the bridge should enable automatic edge detection on the bridge port.
This allows operEdge to be derived from whether BPDU's are received on the port or not.

⚫

Restricted Role :If enabled, causes the port not to be selected as Root Port for the CIST or any MSTI, even if
it has the best spanning tree priority vector. Such a port will be selected as an Alternate Port
after the Root Port has been selected. If set, it can cause lack of spanning tree connectivity.
It can be set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external to a core region of the
network influence the spanning tree active topology, possibly because those bridges are notunder the full control of the administrator. This feature is also known as Root Guard.

⚫

Restricted TCN :If enabled, causes the port not to propagate received topology change notifications andtopology changes to other ports. If set it can cause temporary loss of connectivity after
changes in a spanning tree's active topology as a result of persistently incorrect learned
station location information. It is set by a network administrator to prevent bridges external
to a core region of the network, causing address flushing in that region, possibly because
those bridges are not under the full control of the administrator or the physical link state of
the attached LANs transits frequently.

⚫

BPDU Guard :If enabled, causes the port to disable itself upon receiving valid BPDU's. Contrary to thesimilar bridge setting, the port Edge status does not affect this setting. A port entering error156

disabled state due to this setting is subject to the bridge Port Error Recovery setting as well.
⚫

Point to Point
Controls whether the port connects to a point-to-point LAN rather than to a shared medium.
This can be automatically determined, or forced either true or false. Transition to theforwarding state is faster for point-to-point LANs than for shared media.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

157

6-3 STP Status
This page provides a status overview of all STP bridge instances.
The displayed table contains a row for each STP bridge instance, where the column displays
the following information:

Web Interface
To display the STP Bridges status in the web interface:
1.

Click Spanning Tree and STP Status.

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the STP Bridges.

4.

Click “CIST “to next page “STP Detailed Bridge Status”.

Figure 6-3: The STP status

Parameter description:⚫

MSTI :The Bridge Instance. This is also a link to the STP Detailed Bridge Status.

⚫

Bridge ID :158

The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance.
⚫

Root ID :The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge.

⚫

Root Port :The switch port currently assigned the root port role.

⚫

Root Cost :Root Path Cost. For the Root Bridge it is zero. For all other Bridges, it is the sum of the Port
Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge.

⚫

Topology Flag :The current state of the Topology Change Flag of this Bridge instance.

⚫

Topology Change Last :The time since last Topology Change occurred.
STP Port Status⚫

Port :The switch port number of the logical STP port.

⚫

CIST Role :The current STP port role of the CIST port. The port role can be one of the following values:
AlternatePort, Backup Port, RootPort, DesignatedPort Disabled.

⚫

CIST State :The current STP port state of the CIST port. The port state can be one of the following values:
Blocking Learning Forwarding.

⚫

Uptime :The time since the bridge port was last initialized.

⚫

CIST :
Click to next page “STP Detailed Bridge Status”.
STP Bridge Status⚫

Bridge Instance :The Bridge instance - CIST, MST1, ...

⚫

Bridge ID :The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance.

⚫

Root ID :The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge.

⚫

Root Port :The switch port currently assigned the root port role.

⚫

Root Cost :Root Path Cost. For the Root Bridge this is zero. For all other Bridges, it is the sum of the Port
Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge.

⚫

Regional Root :The Bridge ID of the currently elected regional root bridge, inside the MSTP region of thisbridge. (For the CIST instance only).
159

⚫

Internal Root Cost :The Regional Root Path Cost. For the Regional Root Bridge this is zero. For all other CIST
instances in the same MSTP region, it is the sum of the Internal Port Path Costs on the least
cost path to the Internal Root Bridge. (For the CIST instance only).

⚫

Topology Flag :The current state of the Topology Change Flag of this Bridge instance.

⚫

Topology Change Count :The number of times where the topology change flag has been set (during a one-second
interval).

⚫

Topology Change Last :The time passed since the Topology Flag was last set.
CIST Ports & Aggregations State⚫

Port :The switch port number of the logical STP port.

⚫

Port ID :The port id as used by the STP protocol. This is the priority part and the logical port index of
the bridge port.

⚫

Role :
The current STP port role. The port role can bevalues: AlternatePortBackupPort RootPort DesignatedPort.

⚫

of

the

following

one

of

the

following

State :
The current STP port state. The port
values: DiscardingLearning Forwarding.

⚫

one

state

can

be

Path Cost :The current STP port path cost. This will either be a value computed from the Auto setting,or any explicitly configured value.

⚫

Edge :
The current STP port (operational) Edge Flag. An Edge Port is a switch port to which no
Bridges are attached. The flag may be automatically computed or explicitly configured. Each
Edge Port transits directly to the Forwarding Port State, since there is no possibility of it
participating in a loop.

⚫

Point-to-Point :The current STP port point-to-point flag. A point-to-point port connects to a non-shared
LAN media. The flag may be automatically computed or explicitly configured. The point-topoint properties of a port affect how fast it can transit to STP state.

⚫

Uptime :The time since the bridge port was last initialized.
Buttons

Figure 6-3: The STP status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :160

Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.
⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page.

161

6-4 Port Statistics
This page displays the STP port statistics counters of bridge ports in the switch.

Web Interface
To display the STP Port Statistic in the web interface:
1.

Click Spanning Tree and Port Statistics.

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the STP Bridges.

Figure 6-4: The STP Port Statistics

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The switch port number of the logical STP port.

⚫

MSTP :The number of MSTP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.

⚫

RSTP :The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.

⚫

STP :
The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU's received/transmitted on the port.

⚫

TCN :
The number of (legacy) Topology Change Notification BPDU's received/transmitted on the
port.

⚫

Discarded Unknown :The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU's received (and discarded) on the port.

⚫

Discarded Illegal :The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU's received (and discarded) on the port.
Buttons

Figure 6-4: The STP Port Statistics buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.
162

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

163

Chapter 7

MAC Address Tables

7-1 Configuration
Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame. The switch builds
up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should
go to (based upon the DMAC address in the frame). This table contains both static and dynamic
entries. The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants
to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports.
The frames also contain a MAC address (SMAC address), which shows the MAC address of theequipment sending the frame. The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update
the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses. Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC
table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable
age time

Web Interface
To configure MAC Address Table in the web interface:
1.

Click MAC Address Tables and Configuration.

2.

Specify the Disable Automatic Aging and Aging Time.

3.

Specify the Port Members (Auto, Disable, Secure).

4.

Specify the Learning-disabled VLANs.

5.

Add new Static entry, Specify the VLAN IP and Mac address, Port Members.

6.

Click Apply.

Figure 7-1: The MAC Address Table Configuration

Parameter description:
164

Aging Configuration :By default, dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table after 300 seconds. This removal
is also called aging.
Configure aging time by entering a value here in seconds; for example, Age time seconds.
The allowed range is 10 to 1000000 seconds.
Disable the automatic aging of dynamic entries by checking

Disable automatic aging.

MAC Table Learning :If the learning mode for a given port is greyed out, another module is in control of the mode,so that it cannot be changed by the user. An example of such a module is the MAC-Based
Authentication under 802.1X. Each port can do learning based upon the following settings:⚫

Auto :
Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received.

⚫

Disable :No learning is done.

⚫

Secure :Only static MAC entries are learned, all other frames are dropped.

NOTE: Make sure that the link used for managing the switch isadded to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learningmode, otherwise the management link is lost and can only be restored
by using another non-secure port or by connecting to the switch via
the serial interface.
VLAN Learning Configuration⚫

Learning-disabled VLANS :This field shows the Learning-disabled VLANs. When a NEW MAC arrives into a learningdisabled VLAN, the MAC won't be learnt. By the default, the field is empty. More VLANs may
be created by using a list syntax where the individual elements are separated by commas.
Ranges are specified with a dash separating the lower and upper bound. The following
example will create VLANs 1, 10, 11, 12, 13, 200, and 300: 1,10-13,200,300. Spaces are allowed
in between the delimiters.

Static MAC Table Configuration
The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table. The static MAC table can contain
128 entries. The maximum of 128 entries is for the whole stack, and not per switch.
⚫

VLAN ID :The VLAN ID of the entry.

⚫

MAC Address :The MAC address of the entry.

⚫

Port Members :Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry. Check or uncheck as needed tomodify the entry.
Buttons165

⚫

Add a New Static Entry :Click to add a new entry to the static MAC table. Specify the VLAN ID, MAC address, and port
members for the new entry. Click "Apply".

⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

1667-2 Information
Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page. The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries,
and is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by MAC address.

Web Interface
To Display MAC Address Table in the web interface:
1.

Click MAC Address Table and Information.

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the MAC Address Table.

Figure 7-2: The MAC Address Table Information

Parameter description:

Navigating the MAC Table
Each page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table, default being 10, selected through the"entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first 10 entries fromthe beginning of the MAC Table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID
and the lowest MAC address found in the MAC Table.
⚫

Type :
Indicates whether the entry is a static or a dynamic entry, 802.1x, DMS.

⚫

VLAN :The VLAN ID of the entry.

⚫

MAC address :The MAC address of the entry.

⚫

Port Members :The ports that are members of the entry.
Buttons

Figure 7-2: The MAC Address Table Information buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.
167

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page.

⚫

Clear :
Click to clear the page.

⚫

First Page :Updates the system log entries, turn to the first page.

⚫

Next Page :Updates the system log entries, turn to the next page.

NOTE:
00-40-C7-73-01-29 : your switch MAC address (for IPv4)
33-33-00-00-00-01 : Destination MAC (for IPv6 Router
Advertisement) (reference IPv6 RA.JPG)
33-33-00-00-00-02 : Destination MAC (for IPv6 Router Solicitation)(reference IPv6 RS.JPG)
33-33-FF-73-01-29 : Destination MAC (for IPv6 Neighbor
Solicitation) (reference IPv6 DAD.JPG)
33-33-FF-A8-01-01: your switch MAC address (for IPv6 global IP)
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF: for Broadcast.

168

Chapter 8

Multicast

8-1 IGMP Snooping
The function, is used to establish the multicast groups to forward the multicast packet to themember ports, and, in nature, avoids wasting the bandwidth while IP multicast packets are
running over the network. This is because a switch that does not support IGMP or IGMP
Snooping cannot tell the multicast packet from the broadcast packet, so it can only treat them
all as the broadcast packet. Without IGMP Snooping, the multicast packet forwarding functionis plain and nothing is different from broadcast packet.
A switch supported IGMP Snooping with the functions of query, report and leave, a type of
packet exchanged between IP Multicast Router/Switch and IP Multicast Host, can update theinformation of the Multicast table when a member (port) joins or leaves an IP Multicast
Destination Address. With this function, once a switch receives an IP multicast packet, it will
forward the packet to the members who joined in a specified IP multicast group before.
The packets will be discarded by the IGMP Snooping if the user transmits multicast packets tothe multicast group that had not been built up in advance. IGMP mode enables the switch toissue IGMP function that you enable IGMP proxy or snooping on the switch, which connects toa router closer to the root of the tree. This interface is the upstream interface. The router on the
upstream interface should be running IGMP.

9-1.1 Basic Configuration
The section describes how to set the basic IGMP snooping on the switch, which connects to arouter closer to the root of the tree. This interface is the upstream interface. The router on the
upstream interface should be running IGMPWeb Interface
To configure the IGMP Snooping parameters in the web interface:
1.

Click Multicast, IGMP Snooping and Basic Configuration.

2.

Evoke to select enable or disable which Global configuration

3.

Evoke which port wants to become a Router Port or enable/ disable the Fast Leavefunction.

4.

Scroll to set the Throtting and Profile.

5.

Click the Apply to save the setting.

6.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

115

Figure 8-1.1: The IGMP Snooping Configuration

Parameter description:
Global Configuration⚫

Snooping Enabled :Enable the Global IGMP Snooping.

⚫

Unregistered IPMCv4 Flooding enabled :Enable unregistered IPMCv4 traffic flooding. Unregistered IPMCv4 traffic is so-called
unknown multicast.
After selected, the unregistered multicast stream will be forwarded like normal packets. Onceyou un-selected it, such stream will be discarded⚫

IGMP SSM Range :SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) Range allows the SSM-aware hosts and routers run the SSM
service model for the groups in the address range. Format: (IP address/ sub mask)⚫

Leave Proxy Enabled
Enable IGMP Leave Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leavemessages to the router side.

⚫

Proxy Enabled :Enable IGMP Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leavemessages to the router side.
Port Related Configuration⚫

Port :It shows the physical Port index of switch.

⚫

Router Port :Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that
leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier.
If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port, the whole aggregation will act asa router port.

⚫

Fast Leave :Enable the fast leave on the port.

⚫

Throttling :170

Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong.
⚫

Profile :Select the profile for this port. Click to preview the page which list the rules associated withthe selected profile.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

1718-1.2 VLAN Configuration
Each page shows 20 entries from the VLAN table. When first visited, the web page will show the
first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table.
Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest
VLAN Table match.
The Next Page will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next
lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table.
Use the First Page button to start over.

Web Interface
To configure the IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Multicast, IGMP Snooping and VLAN Configuration.

2.

Configure the parameters and click the Apply to save the setting

3.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

4.

If you want to add vlan, please click System, IP Address, Advanced Settings.
Click Add interface button.

Figure 9-1.2: The IGMP Snooping VLAN Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

VLAN ID :The VLAN ID of the entry⚫

IGMP Snooping Enabled :Enable the per-VLAN IGMP Snooping. Up to 64 VLANs can be selected for IGMP Snooping.

⚫

Querier Election :Enable to join IGMP Querier election in the VLAN. Disable to act as an IGMP Non-Querier.

⚫

Querier Address :Define the IPv4 address as source address used in IP header for IGMP Querier election.
When the Querier address is not set, system uses IPv4 management address of the IP
interface associated with this VLAN.
When the IPv4 management address is not set, system uses the first available IPv4
management address.
Otherwise, system uses a pre-defined value. By default, this value will be 0.0.0.0..
172⚫

Compatibility :Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on
the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network. The allowed selectionis IGMP-Auto, Forced IGMPv1, Forced IGMPv2, Forced IGMPv3, default compatibility value is
IGMP-Auto.

⚫

Rv :Robustness VariaXBFe. The Robustness VariaXBFe allows tuning for the expected packet loss
on a network. The allowed range is 1 to 255; default robustness variaXBFe value is 2.

⚫

QI(sec) :Query Interval. The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier.
The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds; default query interval is 125 seconds.

⚫

QRI(0.1 sec) :Query Response Interval. The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Codeinserted into the periodic General Queries. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths ofseconds; default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds (10 seconds).

⚫

LLQI (0.1 sec) :Last Member Query Interval. The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by
the Last Member Query Interval, multiplied by the Last Member Query Count. The allowed
range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds; default last member query interval is 10 in tenthsof seconds (1 second).

⚫

URI(sec) :Unsolicited Report Interval. The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitionsof a host's initial report of membership in a group. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds,
default unsolicited report interval is 1 second. .
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

⚫

Refresh :Refreshes the displayed table starting from the "VLAN" input fields.

⚫

First Page :Updates the table starting from the first entry in the VLAN Table, i.e. the entry with thelowest VLAN ID.

⚫

Next Page :Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

173

8-1.3 Status
After you complete the IGMP Snooping configuration, then you could to let the switch display
the IGMP Snooping Status. The Section provides you to let switch to display the IGMP Snooping
detail status.

Web Interface
To display the IGMP Snooping status in the web interface:
1.

Click Multicast, IGMP Snooping and Status.

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the IGMP Snooping Status.

Figure 8-1.3: The IGMP Snooping Status

Parameter description:
Statistic⚫

VLAN ID :The VLAN ID of the entry.

⚫

Querier Version :Working Querier Version currently.

⚫

Host Version :Working Host Version currently.

⚫

Querier Status :Shows the Querier status is "ACTIVE" or "IDLE".
"DISABLE" denotes the specific interface is administratively disabled.

⚫

Queries Transmitted :The number of Transmitted Queries.

⚫

Queries Received :The number of Received Queries.

⚫

V1 Reports Received :The number of Received V1 Reports.

⚫

V2 Reports Received :174

The number of Received V2 Reports.
⚫

V3 Reports Received :The number of Received V3 Reports.

⚫

V2 Leaves Received :The number of Received V2 Leaves.
Router Port
Display which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that
leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier. Static denotes the specific port
is configured to be a router port. Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router
port. Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port.

⚫

Port :
Switch port number.

⚫

Status :Indicate whether specific port is a router port or not.
Buttons

Figure 8-1.3: The IGMP Snooping Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

Clear :
Click to clear the page.

175

8-1.4 Group Information
After you complete to set the IGMP Snooping function then you could let the switch to display
the IGMP Snooping Group Information. Entries in the IGMP Group Table are shown on this page.
The IGMP Group Table is sorted first by VLAN ID, and then by group. This will use the last entryof the currently displayed table as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached the text
"No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the button to start over.

Web Interface
To display the IGMP Snooping Group Information in the web interface:
1.

Click Multicast, IGMP Snooping and Group Information.

2.

Specify how many entries to show in one page.

3.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

4.

Click “Refresh” to refresh an entry of the IGMP Snooping Groups Information.

5.

Click First/Next Page to change page.

Figure 8-1.4: The IGMP Snooping Groups Information

Parameter description:

Navigating the IGMP Group Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP Group table, default being 20, selected
through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first
20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP Group Table.
The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in
the IGMP Group Table. Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table startingfrom that or the closest next IGMP Group Table match. In addition, the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing forcontinuous refresh with the same start address.
The Next Page will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next
lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table.
Use the First Page button to start over.
⚫

Show entries :You can choose how many items you want to show up.

⚫

VLAN ID :VLAN ID of the group.

⚫

Groups :Group address of the group displayed.

⚫

Port Members :176

Ports under this group.
Buttons

Figure 8-1.4: The IGMP Snooping Groups Information buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

First Page :Updates the system log entries, turn to the first page.

⚫

Next Page :Updates the group information entries, turn to the next page.

177

8-1.5 IGMP SFM Information
Entries in the IGMP SFM Information Table are shown on this page. The IGMP SFM (SourceFiltered Multicast) Information Table also contains the SSM (Source-Specific Multicast)
information. This table is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group, and then by Port. Different
source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry.

Web Interface
To display the IGMP SFM Information in the web interface:
1.

Click Multicast, IGMP Snooping and IGMP SFM Information

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh an entry of the IGMP Snooping Groups Information.

4.

Click First/Next Page to change page.

Figure 8-1.5: The IGMP SFM Information

Parameter description:
Navigating the IGMP SFM Information Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the IGMP SFM Information table, default being 20,
selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show
the first 20 entries from the beginning of the IGMP SFM Information Table.
The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in
the IGMP SFM Information Table. Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table
starting from that or the closest next IGMP SFM Information Table match. In addition, thetwo input fields will - upon a Refresh button click - assume the value of the first displayed
entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.
The Next Page will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next
lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table.
Use the First Page button to start over.
⚫

Show entries :You can choose how many items you want to show up.

⚫

VLAN ID :VLAN ID of the group.

⚫

Group :
Group address of the group displayed.

⚫

Port :
178

Switch port number.
⚫

Mode :
Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group Address) basis. It
can be either Include or Exclude.

⚫

Source Address :IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source addresses forfiltering to be 128.

⚫

Type :
Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.

⚫

Hardware Filter/Switch :Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source IPv4
address could be handled by chip or not.
Buttons

Figure 8-1.5: The IGMP Snooping Groups Information buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

First Page :Updates the system log entries, turn to the first page.

⚫

Next Page :Updates the group information entries, turn to the next page.

179

8-2 MLD Snooping
Curiously enough, a network node that acts as a source of IPv6 multicast traffic is only anindirect participant in MLD snooping—it just provides multicast traffic, and MLD doesn’t interact
with it. (Note, however, that in an application like desktop conferencing a network node may
act as both a source and an MLD host; but MLD interacts with that node only in its role as an
MLD host.)
A source node creates multicast traffic by sending packets to a multicast address. In IPv6,
addresses with the first eight bits set (that is, “FF” as the first two characters of the address) are
multicast addresses, and any node that listens to such an address will receive the traffic sent tothat address. Application software running on the source and destination systems cooperates
to determine what multicast address to use. (Note that this is a function of the application
software, not of MLD.)
When MLD snooping is enabled on a VLAN, the switch acts to minimize unnecessary multicast
traffic. If the switch receives multicast traffic destined for a given multicast address, it forwards
that traffic only to ports on the VLAN that have MLD hosts for that address. It drops that traffic
for ports on the VLAN that have no MLD hosts

Figure 8-2: The MLD snooping enable

8-2.1 Basic Configuration
The section will let you understand how to configure the MLD Snooping basic configurationand the parameters.

Web Interface
To configure the MLD Snooping Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Multicast, MLD Snooping and Basic Configuration.

2.

Evoke to on or off the Global configuration parameters.

3.

Evoke the port to join Router port and Fast Leave.

4.

Scroll to select the Throtting mode with unlimited or 1 to 10.

5.

Scroll to set the Profile.
180

6.

Click the apply to save the setting.

7.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

Figure 8-2.1: The MLD Snooping Basic Configuration

Parameter description :Global Configuration⚫

Snooping Enabled :Enable the Global MLD Snooping.

⚫

Unregistered IPMCv6 Flooding enabled :Enable unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding.
The flooding control takes effect only when MLD Snooping is enabled.
When MLD Snooping is disabled, unregistered IPMCv6 traffic flooding is always active inspite of this setting.

⚫

MLD SSM Range :SSM (Source-Specific Multicast) Range allows the SSM-aware hosts and routers run the SSM
service model for the groups in the address (Using IPv6 Address) range.

⚫

Leave Proxy Enabled :Enable MLD Leave Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary leavemessages to the router side.

⚫

Proxy Enabled :Enable MLD Proxy. This feature can be used to avoid forwarding unnecessary join and leavemessages to the router side.
Port Related Configuration⚫

Router Port :Specify which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that
leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier. If an aggregation member port isselected as a router port, the whole aggregation will act as a router port.

⚫

Fast Leave :To evoke to enable the fast leave on the port.
181

⚫

Throttling :Enable to limit the number of multicast groups to which a switch port can belong.

⚫

Filtering Profile :You can select profile when you edit in Multicast Filtering Profile.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

182

8-2.2 VLAN Configuration
When MLD snooping is enabled on a VLAN, the switch acts to minimize unnecessary multicast
traffic. If the switch receives multicast traffic destined for a given multicast address, it forwards
that traffic only to ports on the VLAN that have MLD hosts for that address. It drops that traffic
for ports on the VLAN that have no MLD hosts
The will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next lookup. Whenthe end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table. Use the button
to start over.

Web Interface
To configure the MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Multicast, MLD Snooping and VLAN Configuration.

2.

Click Add New MLD VLAN.

3.

Specify the VLAN ID with entries per page.

Figure 8-2.2: The MLD Snooping VLAN Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry. The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

VLAN ID :It displays the VLAN ID of the entry.

⚫

Snooping Enabled :Enable the per-VLAN IGMP Snooping. Only up to 32 VLANs can be selected. .

⚫

MLD Querier:
Enable to join IGMP Querier election in the VLAN. Disable to act as an IGMP Non-Querier.

⚫

Compatibility :Compatibility is maintained by hosts and routers taking appropriate actions depending on
the versions of IGMP operating on hosts and routers within a network. The allowed selectionis IGMP-Auto, Forced IGMPv1, Forced IGMPv2 , default compatibility value is IGMP-Auto.

⚫

RV :Robustness Variable. The Robustness Variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on
a network. The allowed range is 1 to 255; default robustness variable value is 2.

⚫

QI(sec) :Query Interval. The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the Querier.
183

The allowed range is 1 to 31744 seconds; default query interval is 125 seconds.
⚫

QRI(0.1sec) :Query Response Interval. The Max Response Time used to calculate the Max Resp Codeinserted into the periodic General Queries. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 in tenths ofseconds; default query response interval is 100 in tenths of seconds (10 seconds).

⚫

LLQI (LMQI for IGMP) :Last Member Query Interval. The Last Member Query Time is the time value represented by
the Last Member Query Interval, multiplied by the Last Member Query Count. The allowed
range is 0 to 31744 in tenths of seconds; default last member query interval is 10 in tenthsof seconds (1 second).

⚫

URI(sec) :Unsolicited Report Interval. The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitionsof a host's initial report of membership in a group. The allowed range is 0 to 31744 seconds,
default unsolicited report interval is 1 second. .
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

184

8-2.3 Status
The section describes when you complete the MLD Snooping and how to display the MLD
Snooping Status and detail information. It will help you to find out the detail information of
MLD Snooping status.

Web Interface
To display the MLD Snooping Status in the web interface:
1.

Click Multicast, MLD Snooping and Status.

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh an entry of the MLD Snooping Status Information.

Figure 8-2.3: The MLD Snooping Status

Parameter description:⚫

VLAN ID :The VLAN ID of the entry.

⚫

Querier Version :Working Querier Version currently.

⚫

Host Version :Working Host Version currently.

⚫

Querier Status :Show the Querier status is "ACTIVE" or "IDLE".
"DISABLE" denotes the specific interface is administratively disabled.

⚫

Queries Transmitted :The number of Transmitted Queries.

⚫

Queries Received :The number of Received Queries.

⚫

V1 Reports Received :The number of Received V1 Reports.

⚫

V2 Reports Received :185

The number of Received V2 Reports.
⚫

V1 Leaves Received :The number of Received V1 Leaves.
Router Port
Display which ports act as router ports. A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that
leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or MLD querier.
Static denotes the specific port is configured to be a router port.
Dynamic denotes the specific port is learnt to be a router port.
Both denote the specific port is configured or learnt to be a router port.

⚫

Port :
Switch port number.

⚫

Status :Indicate whether specific port is a router port or not.
Buttons

Figure 8-2.3: The MLD Snooping Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

Clear :
Clears the counters for the selected port.

186

8-2.4 Groups Information
Entries in the MLD Group Table are shown on this page. The MLD Group Table is sorted first by
VLAN ID, and then by group.

Web Interface
To display the MLD Snooping Group information in the web interface:
1.

Click Multicast, MLD Snooping and Group Information.

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh an entry of the MLD Snooping Group Information.

4.

Click First/Next Page to change page.

Figure 8-2.4: The MLD Snooping Groups Information

Parameter description:
Navigating the MLD Group Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD Group table, default being 20, selected
through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first
20 entries from the beginning of the MLD Group Table.
The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in
the MLD Group Table. Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table startingfrom that or the closest next MLD Group Table match. In addition, the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing forcontinuous refresh with the same start address.
The Next Page will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next
lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table.
Use the First Page button to start over.
⚫

VLAN ID :VLAN ID of the group.

⚫

Groups :Group address of the group displayed.

⚫

Port Members :Ports under this group.

⚫

Show entries :You can choose how many items you want to show up.
Buttons187

Figure 8-2.4: The MLD Snooping Groups Information buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

First Page :Updates the system log entries, turn to the first page.

⚫

Next Page :Updates the group information entries, turn to the next page.

188

8-2.5 MLD SFM Information
Entries in the MLD SFM Information Table are shown on this page. The MLD SFM (SourceFiltered Multicast) Information Table also contains the SSM (Source-Specific Multicast)
information. This table is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group, and then by Port. Different
source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry.

Web Interface
To display the MLD SFM Information in the web interface:
1.

Click Multicast, MLD Snooping and MLD SFM Information.

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh an entry of the MLD SFM Information.

4.

Click First/Next Page to change page.

Figure 8-2.5: The MLD SFM Information

Parameter description:
Navigating the MLD SFM Information Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MLD SFM Information table, default being 20,
selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show
the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MLD SFM Information Table.
The "Start from VLAN", and "group" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in
the MLD SFM Information Table. Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table
starting from that or the closest next MLD SFM Information Table match. In addition, the two
input fields will - upon a Refresh button click - assume the value of the first displayed entry,
allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.
The Next Page will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next
lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table.
Use the First Page button to start over.
⚫

VLAN ID :VLAN ID of the group.

⚫

Group :IP Multicast Group address.

⚫

Port :
Switch port number.

⚫

Mode :
189

Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group Address) basis. It
can be either Include or Exclude.
⚫

Source Address :IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source addresses forfiltering to be 128.

⚫

Type :
Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.

⚫

Hardware Filter/Switch :Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source IPv6
address could be handled by chip or not.
Buttons

Figure 8-2.5: The MLD SFM Information buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

First Page :Updates the system log entries, turn to the first page.

⚫

Next Page :Updates the group information entries, turn to the next page.

190

8-3 MVR
The MVR feature enables multicast traffic forwarding on the Multicast VLAN. In a multicast
television application, a PC or a television with a set-top box can receive the multicast stream.
Multiple set-top boxes or PCs can be connected to one subscriber port, which is a switch port
configured as an MVR receiver port. When a subscriber selects a channel, the set-top box or PC
sends an IGMP join message to Switch A to join the appropriate multicast. Uplink ports that
send and receive multicast data to and from the multicast VLAN are called MVR source ports.

8-3.1 Basic Configuration
Web Interface
To configure the MVR Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Multicast, MVR and Basic Configuration.

2.

Scroll the MVR mode to enable or disable and Scroll to set all parameters.

3.

Click “Add New MVR VLAN”.

4.

Specify MVR VID, MVR Name, IGMP Address, Mode, Tagging, Priority, LLQI, Interface
Channel Profile.

5.

Select which port to Click Immediate Leave.

6.

Click the apply to save the setting

7.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values

Figure 8-3.1: The MVR Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

MVR Mode :Enable/Disable the Global MVR.
The Unregistered Flooding control depends on the current configuration in IGMP/MLD
Snooping. It is suggested to enable Unregistered Flooding control when the MVR grouptable is full.

⚫

MVR VID :Specify the Multicast VLAN ID.
191

Be Caution: MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with management
VLAN ports.
⚫

MVR Name :MVR Name is an optional attribute to indicate the name of the specific MVR VLAN.
Maximum length of the MVR VLAN Name string is 32. MVR VLAN Name can only containalphabets or numbers. MVR VLAN name can be edited for the existing MVR VLAN entries
or it can be added to the new entries.

⚫

IGMP Address :Define the IPv4 address as source address used in IP header for IGMP control frames.
The default IGMP address is not set (0.0.0.0).
When the IGMP address is not set, system uses IPv4 management address of the IP
interface associated with this VLAN.
When the IPv4 management address is not set, system uses the first available IPv4
management address.
Otherwise, system uses a pre-defined value. By default, this value will be 192.0.2.1.

⚫

Mode :
Specify the MVR mode of operation. In Dynamic mode, MVR allows dynamic MVR
membership reports on source ports. In Compatible mode, MVR membership reports are
forbidden on source ports. The default is Dynamic mode.

⚫

Tagging :Specify whether the traversed IGMP/MLD control frames will be sent as Untagged or
Tagged with MVR VID. The default is tagged.

⚫

Priority :Specify how the traversed IGMP/MLD control frames will be sent in prioritized manner. The
default Priority is 0.

⚫

LLQI :
Define the maximum time to wait for IGMP/MLD report memberships on a receiver port
before removing the port from multicast group membership. The value is in units of tenthsof a seconds. The range is from 0 to 31744. The default LLQI is 5 tenths or one-half second.

⚫

Interface Channel Profile :When the MVR VLAN is created, select the profile to expand the corresponding multicast
channel settings for the specific MVR VLAN. The file established on Filtering Profile Table.

⚫

Port :The logical port for the settings.

⚫

Port Role :Configure an MVR port of the designated MVR VLAN as one of the following roles.
Inactive: The designated port does not participate MVR operations.
Source: Configure uplink ports that receive and send multicast data as source ports.
Subscribers cannot be directly connected to source ports.
Receiver: Configure a port as a receiver port if it is a subscriber port and should only
receive multicast data. It does not receive data unless it becomes a member of themulticast group by issuing IGMP/MLD messages.
Be Caution: MVR source ports are not recommended to be overlapped with management
VLAN ports. Select the port role by clicking the Role symbol to switch the setting. I
192

indicates Inactive; S indicates Source; R indicates Receiver. The default Role is Inactive.
⚫

Immediate Leave :Enable the fast leave on the port.
Buttons⚫

Add New MVR VLAN :Click to add new mvr vlan. Specify MVR VID, MVR Name, IGMP Address, Mode, Tagging,
Priority, LLQI, Interface Channel Profile. Click "Apply"⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry. The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

193

8-3.2 Statistics
The section describes the switch will display the MVR detail Statistics after you had configured
MVR on the switch. It provides the detail MVR Statistics Information

Web Interface
To display the MVR Statistics Information in the web interface:
1.

Click Multicast, MVR and Statistics.

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

3.

To click the “Refresh” to refresh an entry of the MVR Statistics Information.

Figure 8-3.2: The MVR Statistics Information

Parameter description:⚫

VLAN ID :The Multicast VLAN ID.

⚫

IGMP/MLD Queries Received :The number of Received Queries for IGMP and MLD, respectively.

⚫

IGMP/MLD Queries Transmitted :The number of Transmitted Queries for IGMP and MLD, respectively.

⚫

IGMPv1 Joins Received :The number of Received IGMPv1 Join's.

⚫

IGMPv2/MLDv1 Report's Received :The number of Received IGMPv2 Join's and MLDv1 Report's, respectively.

⚫

IGMPv3/MLDv2 Report's Received :The number of Received IGMPv3 Join's and MLDv2 Report's, respectively.

⚫

IGMPv2/MLDv1 Leave's Received :The number of Received IGMPv2 Leave's and MLDv1 Done's, respectively.
Buttons

Figure 8-3.2: The MVR Statistics Information buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.
194

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

Clear :
Clears all Statistics counters.

195

8-3.3 Groups Information
The section describes user could display the MVR Groups detail information on the switch.
Entries in the MVR Group Table are shown on this page. The MVR Group Table is sorted first by
VLAN ID, and then by group

Web Interface
To display the MVR Groups Information in the web interface:
1.

Click Multicast, MVR and Groups Information.

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

3.

To click the “Refresh” to refresh an entry of the MVR Groups Information.

4.

Click First/Next Page to change page.

Figure 8-3.3: The MVR Groups Information

Parameter description:

Navigating the MVR Channels (Groups) Information Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR Group table, default being 20, selected
through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the first
20 entries from the beginning of the MVR Channels (Groups) Information Table.
The "Start from VLAN", and "Group Address" input fields allow the user to select the starting
point in the MVR Channels (Groups) Information Table. Clicking the Refresh button will update
the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MVR Channels (Groups) Information
Table match. In addition, the two input fields will - upon a Refresh button click - assume thevalue of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.
The Next Page will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next
lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table.
Use the First Page button to start over.

MVR Channels (Groups) Information Table Columns⚫

Show entries :You can choose how many items you want to show up.

⚫

VLAN ID :VLAN ID of the group.

⚫

Groups :Group ID of the group displayed.

⚫

Port Members :Ports under this group.
196

Buttons

Figure 8-3.3: The MVR Groups Information buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

First Page :Updates the system log entries, turn to the first page.

⚫

Next Page :Updates the group information entries, turn to the next page.

197

8-3.4 SFM Information
The MVR SFM (Source-Filtered Multicast) Information Table also contains the SSM (SourceSpecific Multicast) information. This table is sorted first by VLAN ID, then by group, and thenby Port. Different source addresses belong to the same group are treated as single entry.

Web Interface
To display the MVR SFM Information in the web interface:
1.

Click Multicast, MVR and MVR SFM Information.

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

3.

To click the “Refresh” to refresh an entry of the MVR Groups Information.

4.

Click First/Next Page to change page.

Figure 8-3.4: The MVR SFM Information

Parameter description:

Navigating the MVR SFM Information Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the MVR SFM Information Table, default being 20,
selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show
the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MVR SFM Information Table.
The "Start from VLAN", and "Group Address" input fields allow the user to select the starting
point in the MVR SFM Information Table. Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed
table starting from that or the closest next MVR SFM Information Table match. In addition, thetwo input fields will - upon a Refresh button click - assume the value of the first displayed
entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address.
The Next Page will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next
lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table.
Use the First Page button to start over.

MVR SFM Information Table Columns⚫

Show entries :You can choose how many items you want to show up.

⚫

VLAN ID :VLAN ID of the group.

⚫

Group :IP Multicast Group address.

⚫

Port :
198

Switch port number.
⚫

Mode :
Indicates the filtering mode maintained per (VLAN ID, port number, Group Address) basis. It
can be either Include or Exclude.

⚫

Source Address :IP Address of the source. Currently, system limits the total number of IP source addresses forfiltering to be 128. When there is not any source filtering address, the text "None" is shownin the Source Address field.

⚫

Type :
Indicates the Type. It can be either Allow or Deny.

⚫

Hardware Filter/Switch :Indicates whether data plane destined to the specific group address from the source
IPv4/IPv6 address could be handled by chip or not.
Buttons

Figure 8-3.4: The MVR SFM Information buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

First Page :Updates the system log entries, turn to the first page.

⚫

Next Page :Updates the group information entries, turn to the next page.

199

8-4 Multicast Filtering Profile
This page provides Multicast Filtering Profile related configurations.

8-4.1 Filtering Profile Table
The IPMC profile is used to deploy the access control on IP multicast streams. It is allowed tocreate at maximum 64 Profiles with at maximum 128 corresponding rules for each.

Web Interface
To configure the IPMC Profile Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Multicast, Multicast Filtering Profile and Filtering Profile Table.

2.

Scroll the Multicast Filtering Profile mode to enable or disable.

3.

Click “Add New Filtering Profile”.

4.

Specify Profile Name, Profile Description and Rule.

5.

Click the apply to save the setting.

6.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

200Figure 8-4.1: The IPMC Profile Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Multicast Filtering Profile Mode :Enable/Disable the Multicast Filtering Profile.
System starts to do filtering based on profile settings only when the global profile mode isenabled.

⚫

Profile Name :The name used for indexing the profile table.
Each entry has the unique name which is composed of at maximum 16 alphabetic andnumeric characters.

⚫

Profile Description :Additional description, which is composed of at maximum 64 alphabetic and numericcharacters, about the profile.
No blank or space characters are permitted as part of description. Use "_" or "-" to seperate
the description sentence.

⚫

Rule :
When the profile is created, click the edit button to enter the rule setting page of thedesignated profile. Summary about the designated profile will be shown by clicking theview button. You can manage or inspect the rules of the designated profile by using thefollowing buttons:
Preview: Preview the rules associated with the designated profile.
Edit: Adjust the rules associated with the designated profile.

⚫

Profile Name & Index:
The name of the designated profile to be associated. This field is not editable.

⚫

Entry Name :The name used in specifying the address range used for this rule.
Only the existing profile address entries will be chosen in the selected box. This field is notallowed to be selected as none ("-") while the Rule Settings Table is committed.

⚫

Address Range :The corresponding address range of the selected profile entry. This field is not editable andwill be adjusted automatically according to the selected profile entry.

⚫

Action :Indicates the learning action upon receiving the Join/Report frame that has the groupaddress matches the address range of the rule.
201

Permit: Group address matches the range specified in the rule will be learned.
Deny: Group address matches the range specified in the rule will be dropped.
⚫

Log :Indicates the logging preference upon receiving the Join/Report frame that has the groupaddress matches the address range of the rule.
Enable: Corresponding information of the group address, that matches the range specified
in the rule, will be logged.
Disable: Corresponding information of the group address, that matches the range specified
in the rule, will not be logged.

⚫

Rule Management Buttons :You can manage rules and the corresponding precedence order by using the following
buttons:: Insert a new rule before the current entry of rule.
: Delete the current entry of rule.
: Moves the current entry of rule up in the list.
: Moves the current entry of rule down in the list.
Buttons⚫

Add New Filtering Profile :Click to add new IPMC profile. Specify the name and configure the new entry. Click "Save".

⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry.
The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

⚫

Add Last Rule :Click to add a new rule in the end of the specific profile's rule list. Specify the address entry
and configure the new entry. Click "Apply"202

8-4.2 Filtering Address Entry
This page provides address range settings used in IPMC profile.
The address entry is used to specify the address range that will be associated with IPMC Profile.
It is allowed to create at maximum 128 address entries in the system.

Web Interface
To configure the IPMC Profile Address Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Multicast, Multicast Filtering Profile and Filtering Address Entry.

2.

Click “Add New Address (Range) Entry”.

3.

Specify Entry Name, Start Address and End Address.

4.

Click the apply to save the setting.

5.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

6.

Click “Refresh” to refresh an entry of the MLD Snooping Group Information.

7.

Click First Entry/Next Entry to change Entry.

Figure 8-4.2: The IPMC Profile Address Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Entry Name :The name used for indexing the address entry table.
Each entry has the unique name which is composed of at maximum 16 alphabetic andnumeric characters.

⚫

Start Address :The starting IPv4/IPv6 Multicast Group Address that will be used as an address range.

⚫

End Address :203

The ending IPv4/IPv6 Multicast Group Address that will be used as an address range.
Buttons⚫

Add New Address (Range) Entry :Click to add new address range. Specify the name and configure the addresses. Click"Apply"⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry.
The designated entry will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

⚫

First Entry :Updates the table starting from the first entry in the IPMC Profile Address Configuration.

⚫

Next Entry :Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

204

Chapter 9

DHCP

The section describes to configure and display the DHCP Snooping parameters of the switch.
The DHCP Snooping can prevent attackers from adding their own DHCP servers to the network.

9-1 Snooping
9-1.1 Configuration
DHCP Snooping is used to block intruder on the untrusted ports of the switch device when ittries to intervene by injecting a bogus DHCP reply packet to a legitimate conversation between
the DHCP client and server.
The section describes to configure the DHCP Snooping parameters of the switch. The DHCP
Snooping can prevent attackers from adding their own DHCP servers to the network.

Web Interface
To configure DHCP snooping in the web interface:
1.

Click DHCP, Snooping and Configuration.

2.

Select “on” in the Mode of DHCP Snooping Configuration.

3.

Select “Trusted” of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 9-1.1: The DHCP Snooping Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Snooping Mode :Indicates the DHCP snooping mode operation. Possible modes are:on: Enable DHCP snooping mode operation. When DHCP snooping mode operation isenabled, the DHCP request messages will be forwarded to trusted ports and only allow reply
packets from trusted ports.
off: Disable DHCP snooping mode operation.

⚫

Port Mode Configuration
205

Indicates the DHCP snooping port mode. Possible port modes are:
Trusted: Configures the port as trusted source of the DHCP messages. Trusted port canforward DHCP packets normally.
Untrusted: Configures the port as untrusted source of the DHCP messages. Untrusted port
will discard the packets when it receive DHCP packets.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

2069-1.2 Snooping Table
This page display the dynamic IP assigned information after DHCP Snooping mode is enabled.
All DHCP clients obtained the dynamic IP address from the DHCP server will be listed in thistable except for local VLAN interface IP addresses. Entries in the Dynamic DHCP snooping Tableare shown on this page.

Web Interface
To monitor a DHCP in the web interface:
1.

Click DHCP, Snooping and Snooping table.

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

3.

To click the “Refresh” to refresh an entry of the MVR Groups Information.

4.

Click First/Next Page to change page.

Figure 9-1.2: The DHCP snooping table

Parameter description:⚫

Show entries :You can choose how many items you want to show up.

⚫

MAC Address :User MAC address of the entry.

⚫

VLAN ID :VLAN-ID in which the DHCP traffic is permitted.

⚫

Source Port:
Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed.

⚫

IP Address :User IP address of the entry.

⚫

IP Subnet Mask :User IP subnet mask of the entry.

⚫

DHCP Server :DHCP Server address of the entry.

Buttons

Figure 10-1.2: The DHCP snooping table buttons

207

⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

First Page :Updates the system log entries, turn to the first page.

⚫

Next Page :Updates the group information entries, turn to the next page.

208

9-1.3 Detailed Statistics
This page provides statistics for DHCP snooping. Notice that the normal forward per-port TX
statistics isn't increased if the incoming DHCP packet is done by L3 forwarding mechanism. And
clear the statistics on specific port may not take effect on global statistics since it gathers thedifferent layer overview.

Web Interface
To display a DHCP Relay statistics in the web interface:
1.

Click DHCP, Snooping and Detailed Statistics.

2.

Select port that you want to display the DHCP Detailed Statistics.

3.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

4.

To click the “Refresh” to refresh an entry of the DHCP Detailed Statistics.

Figure 9-1.3: The DHCP Detailed Statistics

Parameter description:
Server Statistics⚫

Rx and Tx Discover :The number of discover (option 53 with value 1) packets received and transmitted.

⚫

Rx and Tx Offer :The number of offer (option 53 with value 2) packets received and transmitted.

⚫

Rx and Tx Request :The number of request (option 53 with value 3) packets received and transmitted.

⚫

Rx and Tx Decline :The number of decline (option 53 with value 4) packets received and transmitted.

⚫

Rx and Tx ACK :The number of ACK (option 53 with value 5) packets received and transmitted.

⚫

Rx and Tx NAK :The number of NAK (option 53 with value 6) packets received and transmitted.

209

⚫

Rx and Tx Release :The number of release (option 53 with value 7) packets received and transmitted.

⚫

Rx and Tx Inform :The number of inform (option 53 with value 8) packets received and transmitted.

⚫

Rx and Tx Lease Query :The number of lease query (option 53 with value 10) packets received and transmitted.

⚫

Rx and Tx Lease Unassigned :The number of lease unassigned (option 53 with value 11) packets received and transmitted.

⚫

Rx and Tx Lease Unknown :The number of lease unknown (option 53 with value 12) packets received and transmitted. Rx and Tx
Lease Active⚫

Rx and Tx Lease Active :The number of lease active (option 53 with value 13) packets received and transmitted.

⚫

Rx Discarded checksum error :The number of discard packet that IP/UDP checksum is error.

⚫

Rx Discarded from Untrusted :The number of discarded packet that are coming from untrusted port.

Buttons

Figure 9-1.3: The DHCP Detailed Statistics buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

Port 1 :Select port that you want to display the DHCP Detailed Statistics.

210

9-2 Relay
9-2.1 Configuration

A DHCP relay agent is used to forward and to transfer DHCP messages
between the clients and the server when they are not in the same subnet
domain. It stores the incoming interface IP address in the GIADDR field of the
DHCP packet. The DHCP server can use the value of GIADDR field todetermine the assigned subnet. For such condition, please make sure theswitch configuration of VLAN interface IP address and PVID(Port VLAN ID)
correctly.
Web Interface
To configure DHCP Relay in the web interface:
1.

Click DHCP, Relay and Configuration.

2.

Specify the Relay Mode, Relay server, Relay Information Mode, Relay Information Policy.

3.

Click Apply.

Figure 9-2.1: The DHCP Relay Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Relay Mode :Indicates the DHCP relay mode operation.
Possible modes are:on: Enable DHCP relay mode operation. When DHCP relay mode operation is enabled, theagent forwards and transfers DHCP messages between the clients and the server when they
are not in the same subnet domain. And the DHCP broadcast message won't be flooded for
security considerations.
off: Disable DHCP relay mode operation.

⚫

Relay Server :Indicates the DHCP relay server IP address.

⚫

Relay Information Mode :Indicates the DHCP relay information mode option operation. The option 82 circuit ID format
as "[vlan_id][module_id][port_no]". The first four characters represent the VLAN ID, the fifthand sixth characters are the module ID(in standalone device it always equal 0, in stackable211

device it means switch ID), and the last two characters are the port number. For example,"00030108" means the DHCP message receive form VLAN ID 3, switch ID 1, port No 8. And
the option 82 remote ID value is equal the switch MAC address.
Possible modes are:Enabled: Enable DHCP relay information mode operation. When DHCP relay information
mode operation is enabled, the agent inserts specific information (option 82) into a DHCP
message when forwarding to DHCP server and removes it from a DHCP message whentransferring to DHCP client. It only works when DHCP relay operation mode is enabled.
Disabled: Disable DHCP relay information mode operation.
⚫

Relay Information Policy :Indicates the DHCP relay information option policy. When DHCP relay information mode
operation is enabled, if the agent receives a DHCP message that already contains relay
agent information it will enforce the policy. The 'Replace' policy is invalid when relay
information mode is disabled. Possible policies are:Replace: Replace the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains
it is received.
Keep: Keep the original relay information when a DHCP message that already contains it isreceived.
Drop: Drop the package when a DHCP message that already contains relay information isreceived.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

212

9-2.2 Statistics
This page provides statistics for DHCP relay.

Web Interface
To monitor a DHCP Relay statistics in the web interface:
1.

Click DHCP, Relay and Statistics.

2.

To display DHCP relay statistics.

3.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

4.

To click the “Refresh” to refresh an entry of the DHCP Detailed Statistics.

Figure 9-2.2: The DHCP relay statistics

Parameter description:
Server Statistics⚫

Transmit to Server :The number of packets that are relayed from client to server.

⚫

Transmit Error :The number of packets that resulted in errors while being sent to clients.

⚫

Receive from Server :The number of packets received from server.

⚫

Receive Missing Agent Option:
The number of packets received without agent information options.

⚫

Receive Missing Circuit ID :The number of packets received with the Circuit ID option missing.

⚫

Receive Missing Remote ID :The number of packets received with the Remote ID option missing.

⚫

Receive Bad Circuit ID :The number of packets whose Circuit ID option did not match known circuit ID.

213

⚫

Receive Bad Remote ID :The number of packets whose Remote ID option did not match known Remote ID.

Client Statistics⚫

Transmit to Client :The number of relayed packets from server to client.

⚫

Transmit Error :The number of packets that resulted in error while being sent to servers.

⚫

Receive from Client :The number of received packets from server.

⚫

Receive Agent Option :The number of received packets with relay agent information option.

⚫

Replace Agent Option :The number of packets which were replaced with relay agent information option.

⚫

Keep Agent Option :The number of packets whose relay agent information was retained.

⚫

Drop Agent Option :The number of packets that were dropped which were received with relay agent information.

Buttons

Figure 9-2.2: The DHCP relay statistics buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

Clear :
Clear all statistics.

214

9-3 Server
9-3.1 Configuration
This page configures mode to enable/disable DHCP server per system and per VLAN. And
configures Start IP and End IP addresses. DHCP server will allocate these IP addresses to DHCP
client. And deliver configuration parameters to DHCP client.

Web Interface
To configure DHCP server Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click DHCP, Server and Configurtion.

2.

Click “Add Interface”.

3.

Specify VLAN, Mode, Start IP, End IP, Lease time, Subnet mask, Default router, DNS server.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 9-3.1: The DHCP server configuration

Parameter description:⚫

VLAN:
Configure the VLAN in which DHCP server is enabled or disabled. Allowed VLAN are in the range
1 through 4095⚫

Mode :
Indicate the operation mode per VLAN. Possible modes are:Enable: Enable DHCP server per VLAN.
Disable: Disable DHCP server pre VLAN.

⚫

Start IP and End IP :Define the IP range. The Start IP must be smaller than or equal to the End IP.

⚫

Lease Time :Display lease time of the pool.

⚫

Subnet Mask :Configure subnet mask of the DHCP address.

⚫

Default router :Configure the destination IP network or host address of this route.

⚫

DNS Server :Specify DNS server.
Buttons⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
215

⚫

Add Interface :Click to add a new DHCP server.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

216

9-3.2 Status
This page displays DHCP server status.

Web Interface
To display DHCP server status in the web interface:
1.

Click DHCP, Server and Status.

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

3.

To click the “Refresh” to refresh an entry of the DHCP server status.

Figure 9-3.2: The DHCP server status

Parameter description:⚫

VLAN:
The VLAN ID of the entry.

⚫

Type :
Indicate the operation type per VLAN. Possible types are: Static and DMS.

⚫

Start IP and End IP :Display the Start IP and the End IP.

⚫

Lease Time :Display lease time of the pool.

⚫

Subnet Mask :Display subnet mask of the DHCP address.

⚫

Default router :Display the destination IP network or host address of this route.

⚫

DNS Server :Display DNS server.
Buttons

Figure 9-3.2: The DHCP server status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.
217

Chapter 10

SecurityThis section shows you to configure the Port Security settings of the Switch. You can use thePort Security feature to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC addresses.

10-1 Management
10-1.1 AccountThis page provides an overview of the current users. Currently the only way to login as anotheruser on the web server is to close and reopen the browser

Web Interface
To configure User in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, Management and Account.

2.

Click Add new user

3.

Specify the User Name parameter.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 10-1.1: The Account configuration

Parameter description:⚫

User Name :The name identifying the user. The field can be input 31 characters. This is also a link to
Add/Edit User.

⚫

Password :218

To type the password. The field can be input 31 characters, and the allowed content is the
ASCII characters from 32 to 126.
⚫

Password (again) :To type the password again. You must type the same password again in the field.

⚫

Privilege Level :The privilege level of the user. The allowed range is 0 to 15. If the privilege level value is 15,
it can access all groups, i.e. that is granted the fully control of the device. But others value
need to refer to each group privilege level. User's privilege should be same or greater than
the group privilege level to have the access of that group. By default setting, most groups
privilege level 5 has the read-only access and privilege level 10 has the read-write access.
And the system maintenance (software upload, factory defaults and etc.) need user privilege
level 15. Generally, the privilege level 15 can be used for an administrator account, privilege
level 10 for a standard user account and privilege level 5 for a guest account.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

⚫

Cancel :Click to undo any changes made locally and return to the Users.

⚫

Delete User :Delete the current user. This button is not available for new configurations (Add new user)219

10-1.2 Privilege Levels
This page provides an overview of the privilege levels. The switch provides user set Account,
Aggregation, Diagnostics, EEE, GARP, GVRP,IP, IPMC Snooping LACP LLDP LLDP MED MAC
Table MRP MVR MVRP Maintenance Mirroring Ports Private VLANs QoS SMTP SNMP Security
Spanning Tree System Trap Event VCL VLANs Voice VLAN Privilege Levels from 1 to 15 .

Web Interface
To configure Privilege Level in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, Management and Privilege Levels.

2.

Specify the Privilege parameter.

3.

Click Apply.

Figure10-1.2: The Privilege Level configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Group Name :The name identifying the privilege group. In most cases, a privilege level group consists of asingle module (e.g. LACP, STP or QoS), but a few of them contains more than one. The
following description defines these privilege level groups in details:
System: Contact, Name, Location, Timezone, Daylight Saving Time, Log.

⚫

Privilege Levels :Every group has an authorization Privilege level for the following sub groups: configuration
read-only, configuration/execute read-write. User Privilege should be same or greater than
the authorization Privilege level to have the access to that group.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

22010-1.3 Auth Method
This page shows how to configure a user with auth method when he logs into the switch via
one of the management client interfaces.

Web Interface
To configure an Auth Method Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, Management and Auth Method.

2.

Specify the Client (console, telent, ssh, web) which you want to monitor.

3.

Specify the Methods (none, local, radius, tacacs), Service port, Cmd Lvl, Cfg Cmd,
Fallback, Exec.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 10-1.3: The Authentication Method Configuration

Parameter description:
Authentication Method Configuration⚫

Client :The management client for which the configuration below applies.

⚫

Method :Authentication Method can be set to one of the following values:••••

none : authentication is disabled and login is not possible.
local : use the local user database on the switch for authentication.
radius : use a remote RADIUS server for authentication.
tacacs : use a remote TACACS server for authentication.
221

Methods that involves remote servers are timed out if the remote servers are offline. In thiscase the next method is tried. Each method is tried from left to right and continues until amethod either approves or rejects a user. If a remote server is used for primaryauthentication it is recommended to configure secondary authentication as 'local'. This will
enable the management client to login via the local user database if none of the configured
authentication servers are alive.
⚫

Service Port :The TCP port for each client service. The valid port number is 1 ~ 65534.

⚫

HTTP Redirect :Enable http Automatic Redirect.
Command Authorization Method Configuration⚫

Client :The management client for which the configuration below applies.

⚫

Method :Authorization Method can be set to one of the following values:••⚫

none : authorization is disabled and login is not possible.
tacacs : use a remote TACACS+ server for authorization.

Cmd Lvl :Runs authorization for all commands at the specified privilege level. Specific command levelthat should be authorized. Valid entries are 0 through 15.

⚫

Cfg Cmd :Enable or disable the configure command.

⚫

Fallback :The local database can act as a fallback method for several functions. This behavior isdesigned to help you prevent accidental lockout from the security appliance.
Accounting Method Configuration⚫

Client :The management client for which the configuration below applies.

⚫

Method :Accounting Method can be set to one of the following values:••⚫

none : accounting is disabled and login is not possible.
tacacs : use a remote TACACS+ server for accounting.

Cmd Lvl :Runs accounting for all commands at the specified privilege level. Specific command levelthat should be authorized. Valid entries are
0 through 15.

⚫

Exec :
Runs accounting to determine if the user is allowed to run an EXEC shell. This facility might
return user profile information such as auto command information.
Buttons222

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

22310-1.4 Access Method
This section shows you to configure access management table of the Switch including
HTTP/HTTPS, SNMP, and TELNET/SSH. You can manage the Switch over an Ethernet LAN, orover the Internet.

Web Interface
To configure an Access Method Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, Management and Access Method.

2.

Select “on” in the Mode of Access Management Configuration.

3.

Click “Add new entry”.

4.

Specify the VLAN ID, Start IP Address, End IP Address.

5.

Checked Access Management method (HTTP/HTTPS, SNMP, and TELNET/SSH) in theentry.

6.

Click Apply.

Figure 10-1.4: The Access Method Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Mode :
Indicates the access management mode operation. Possible modes are:On : Enable access management mode operation.
Off : Disable access management mode operation.

⚫

VLAN ID :Indicates the VLAN ID for the access management entry.

⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

Start IP address :Indicates the start IP unicast address for the access management entry.

⚫

End IP address :Indicates the end IP unicast address for the access management entry.

⚫

HTTP/HTTPS :Indicates that the host can access the switch from HTTP/HTTPS interface if the host IP address
matches the IP address range provided in the entry.
224

⚫

SNMP :
Indicates that the host can access the switch from SNMP interface if the host IP address
matches the IP address range provided in the entry.

⚫

TELNET/SSH :Indicates that the host can access the switch from TELNET/SSH interface if the host IP address
matches the IP address range provided in the entry.
Buttons⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add a new access management entry.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

22510-1.5 HTTPSThis page allows you to configure the HTTPS settings and maintain the current certificate on
the switch.

Web Interface
To configure an Access Management Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Configuration, Security, Management and HTTPS.

2.

Specify the Certificate Maintain, Certificate Pass Phrase, Certificate Upload.

3.

Chick Browser to select the file to upload.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 10-1.5: The HTTPS Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Certificate Maintain :The operation of certificate maintenance.
Possible operations are:Upload: Upload a certificate PEM file. Possible methods are: Web Browser or URL.
Generate: Generate a new self-signed RSA certificate.

⚫

Certificate Pass Phrase :Enter the pass phrase in this field if your uploading certificate is protected by a specificpassphrase.

⚫

Certificate Upload :Upload a certificate PEM file into the switch. The file should contain the certificate andprivate key together. If you have two separated files for saving certificate and private key.
Use the Linux cat command to combine them into a single PEM file. For example, cat
my.cert my.key > my.pem
Notice that the RSA certificate is recommended since most of the new version of browsers
has removed support for DSA in certificate, e.g. Firefox v37 and Chrome v39.
Possible methods are:
Web Browser: Upload a certificate via Web browser.
URL: Upload a certificate via URL, the supported protocols are HTTP, HTTPS, TFTP and FTP.
The URL format is <protocol>://[<username>[:<password>]@]<
host>[:<port>][/<path>]/<file_name>. For example,
tftp://10.10.10.10/new_image_path/new_image.dat,
http://username:password@10.10.10.10:80/new_image_path/new_image.dat. A valid filename is a text string drawn from alphabet (A-Za-z), digits (0-9), dot (.), hyphen (-), underscore(_). The maximum length is 63 and hyphen must not be first character. The file namecontent that only contains '.' is not allowed.
226

⚫

Certificate Status :Display the current status of certificate on the switch.
Possible statuses are:Switch secure HTTP certificate is presented.
Switch secure HTTP certificate is not presented.
Switch secure HTTP certificate is generating ....
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

22710-2 802.1X
10-2.1 Configuration
The section describes to configure the 802.1X parameters of the switch. The 802.1X can be
employed to connect users to a variety of resources including Internet access, conference calls,
printing documents on shared printers, or by simply logging on to the Internet.

Web Interface
To configure the IEEE 802.1X in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, 802.1X and Configuration.

2.

Select “on” in the Mode of IEEE 802.1X Configuration.

3.

Checked Reauthentication Enabled.

4.

Set Reauthentication Period (Default is 3600 seconds).

5.

Set EAPOL Timeout (Default is 30 seconds).

6.

Set Aging Period (Default is 300 seconds).

7.

Set Hold Time (Default is 10 seconds).

8.

Checked RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled.

9.

Checked RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled.

10.

Checked Guest VLAN Enabled.

11.

Specify Guest VLAN ID.

12.

Specify Max. Reauth. Count.

13.

Checked Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen.

14.

Select Admin State and displays Port State.

15.

Click the Apply to save the setting.

16.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

228

Figure 10-2.1: The IEEE 802.1X Configuration

Parameter description:
System Configuration⚫

Mode :
on or off.
Indicates if IEEE 802.1X is globally enabled or disabled on the switch. If globally disabled, allports are allowed forwarding of frames.

⚫

Reauthentication Enabled :If checked, successfully authenticated supplicants/clients are reauthenticated after theinterval specified by the Reauthentication Period. Reauthentication for 802.1X-enabled ports
can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port or if a supplicant is nolonger attached.
For MAC-based ports, reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration haschanged. It does not involve communication between the switch and the client, and therefore
doesn't imply that a client is still present on a port (see Aging Period below).

⚫

Reauthentication Period :Determines the period, in seconds, after which a connected client must be reauthenticated.
This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked. Valid values are in
the range 1 to 3600 seconds.

⚫

EAPOL Timeout :Determines the time for retransmission of Request Identity EAPOL frames.
Valid values are in the range 1 to 65535 seconds. This has no effect for MAC-based ports.

⚫

Aging Period :This setting applies to the following modes, i.e. modes using the Port Security functionality
to secure MAC addresses:• Single 802.1X• Multi 802.1X• MAC-Based Auth.
When the NAS module uses the Port Security module to secure MAC addresses, the Port
Security module needs to check for activity on the MAC address in question at regularintervals and free resources if no activity is seen within a given period of time. This parameter
controls exactly this period and can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds.
If reauthentication is enabled and the port is in an 802.1X-based mode, this is not so critical,
since supplicants that are no longer attached to the port will get removed upon the next
reauthentication, which will fail. But if reauthentication is not enabled, the only way to freeresources is by aging the entries.
For ports in MAC-based Auth. mode, reauthentication doesn't cause direct communication
between the switch and the client, so this will not detect whether the client is still attached
or not, and the only way to free any resources is to age the entry.

⚫

Hold Time :This setting applies to the following modes, i.e. modes using the Port Security functionality
to secure MAC addresses:• Single 802.1X• Multi 802.1X• MAC-Based Auth.
If a client is denied access - either because the RADIUS server denies the client access or229because the RADIUS server request times out (according to the timeout specified on the"Configuration→Security→AAA" page) - the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state.
The hold timer does not count during an on-going authentication.
In MAC-based Auth. mode, the switch will ignore new frames coming from the client during
the hold time.
The Hold Time can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds.
⚫

RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled :RADIUS-assigned QoS provides a means to centrally control the traffic class to which traffic
coming from a successfully authenticated supplicant is assigned on the switch. The RADIUS
server must be configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of thisfeature (see RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled below for a detailed description).
The "RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globallyenable/disable RADIUS-server assigned QoS Class functionality. When checked, theindividual ports' ditto setting determine whether RADIUS-assigned QoS Class is enabled onthat port. When unchecked, RADIUS-server assigned QoS Class is disabled on all ports.

⚫

RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled :RADIUS-assigned VLAN provides a means to centrally control the VLAN on which a
successfully authenticated supplicant is placed on the switch. Incoming traffic will beclassified to and switched on the RADIUS-assigned VLAN. The RADIUS server must be
configured to transmit special RADIUS attributes to take advantage of this feature(see RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled below for a detailed description).
The "RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globallyenable/disable RADIUS-server assigned VLAN functionality. When checked, the individual
ports' ditto setting determine whether RADIUS-assigned VLAN is enabled on that port. Whenunchecked, RADIUS-server assigned VLAN is disabled on all ports.

⚫

Guest VLAN Enabled :A Guest VLAN is a special VLAN - typically with limited network access - on which 802.1Xunaware clients are placed after a network administrator-defined timeout. The switch follows
a set of rules for entering and leaving the Guest VLAN as listed below.
The "Guest VLAN Enabled" checkbox provides a quick way to globally enable/disable Guest
VLAN functionality. When checked, the individual ports' ditto setting determines whether the
port can be moved into Guest VLAN. When unchecked, the ability to move to the Guest
VLAN is disabled on all ports.

⚫

Guest VLAN ID :This is the value that a port's Port VLAN ID is set to if a port is moved into the Guest VLAN.
It is only changeable if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.
Valid values are in the range [1; 4094].

⚫

Max. Reauth. Count :The number of times the switch transmits an EAPOL Request Identity frame without response
before considering entering the Guest VLAN is adjusted with this setting. The value can only
be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.
Valid values are in the range [1; 255].

⚫

Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen :The switch remembers if an EAPOL frame has been received on the port for the life-time ofthe port. Once the switch considers whether to enter the Guest VLAN, it will first check if thisoption is enabled or disabled. If disabled (unchecked; default), the switch will only enter the
Guest VLAN if an EAPOL frame has not been received on the port for the life-time of the port.
If enabled (checked), the switch will consider entering the Guest VLAN even if an EAPOL
230

frame has been received on the port for the life-time of the port.
The value can only be changed if the Guest VLAN option is globally enabled.
Port Configuration⚫

Port :The port number for which the configuration below applies.

⚫

Admin State :If 802.1X is globally enabled, this selection controls the port's authentication mode.
following modes are available:◼

The

Force Authorized :In this mode, the switch will send one EAPOL Success frame when the port link comes up,
and any client on the port will be allowed network access without authentication.

◼

Force Unauthorized :In this mode, the switch will send one EAPOL Failure frame when the port link comes up,
and any client on the port will be disallowed network access.

◼

Port-based 802.1X :In the 802.1X-world, the user is called the supplicant, the switch is the authenticator, andthe RADIUS server is the authentication server. The authenticator acts as the man-in-themiddle, forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication
server. Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802.1X frames,
known as EAPOL (EAP Over LANs) frames. EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs (RFC3748).
Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets. RADIUS
packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch's IP
address, name, and the supplicant's port number on the switch. EAP is very flexible, in thatit allows for different authentication methods, like MD5-Challenge, PEAP, and TLS. The
important thing is that the authenticator (the switch) doesn't need to know whichauthentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using, or how
many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method. The switch simply
encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type (EAPOL or RADIUS) andforwards it.
When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a
success or failure indication. Besides forwarding this decision to the supplicant, the switch
uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant

NOTE: Suppose two backend servers are enabled and that the server
timeout is configured to X seconds (using the AAA configurationpage), and suppose that the first server in the list is currently down
(but not considered dead).
Now, if the supplicant retransmits EAPOL Start frames at a rate fasterthan X seconds, then it will never get authenticated, because theswitch will cancel on-going backend authentication server requests
whenever it receives a new EAPOL Start frame from the supplicant.
And since the server hasn't yet failed (because the X seconds haven't
expired), the same server will be contacted upon the next backend
authentication server request from the switch. This scenario will loop
forever. Therefore, the server timeout should be smaller than the
supplicant's EAPOL Start frame retransmission rate.
231

◼

Single 802.1X :In port-based 802.1X authentication, once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on aport, the whole port is opened for network traffic. This allows other clients connected tothe port (for instance through a hub) to piggy-back on the successfully authenticatedclient and get network access even though they really aren't authenticated. To overcome
this security breach, use the Single 802.1X variant. Single 802.1X is really not an IEEE
standard, but features many of the same characteristics as does port-based 802.1X. In
Single 802.1X, at most one supplicant can get authenticated on the port at a time. Normal
EAPOL frames are used in the communication between the supplicant and the switch. If
more than one supplicant is connected to a port, the one that comes first when the port's
link comes up will be the first one considered. If that supplicant doesn't provide valid
credentials within a certain amount of time, another supplicant will get a chance. Once a
supplicant is successfully authenticated, only that supplicant will be allowed access. Thisis the most secure of all the supported modes. In this mode, the Port Security module isused to secure a supplicant's MAC address once successfully authenticated.

◼

Multi 802.1X :In port-based 802.1X authentication, once a supplicant is successfully authenticated on aport, the whole port is opened for network traffic. This allows other clients connected tothe port (for instance through a hub) to piggy-back on the successfully authenticatedclient and get network access even though they really aren't authenticated. To overcome
this security breach, use the Multi 802.1X variant.
Multi 802.1X is really not an IEEE standard, but features many of the same characteristics
as does port-based 802.1X. Multi 802.1X is - like Single 802.1X - not an IEEE standard, but
a variant that features many of the same characteristics. In Multi 802.1X, one or more
supplicants can get authenticated on the same port at the same time. Each supplicant isauthenticated individually and secured in the MAC table using the Port Security module.
In Multi 802.1X it is not possible to use the multicast BPDU MAC address as destination
MAC address for EAPOL frames sent from the switch towards the supplicant, since thatwould cause all supplicants attached to the port to reply to requests sent from the switch.
Instead, the switch uses the supplicant's MAC address, which is obtained from the first
EAPOL Start or EAPOL Response Identity frame sent by the supplicant. An exception tothis is when no supplicants are attached. In this case, the switch sends EAPOL Request
Identity frames using the BPDU multicast MAC address as destination - to wake up any
supplicants that might be on the port.
The maximum number of supplicants that can be attached to a port can be limited using
the Port Security Limit Control functionality.

◼

MAC-based Auth.:
Unlike port-based 802.1X, MAC-based authentication is not a standard, but merely a bestpractices method adopted by the industry. In MAC-based authentication, users are calledclients, and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients. The initial frame (anykind of frame) sent by a client is snooped by the switch, which in turn uses the client's
MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the
RADIUS server. The 6-byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form
"xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx", that is, a dash (-) is used as separator between the lower-cased
hexadecimal digits. The switch only supports the MD5-Challenge authentication method,
so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly.
When authentication is complete, the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication,
which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client, using
the Port Security module. Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch.
There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication, and therefore, MAC-based
Authentication has nothing to do with the 802.1X standard.
232

The advantage of MAC-based authentication over port-based 802.1X is that several
clients can be connected to the same port (e.g. through a 3rd party switch or a hub) andstill require individual authentication, and that the clients don't need special supplicant
software to authenticate. The advantage of MAC-based authentication over 802.1X-based
authentication is that the clients don't need special supplicant software to authenticate.
The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users - equipment
whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone. Also, only the MD5Challenge method is supported. The maximum number of clients that can be attached toa port can be limited using the Port Security Limit Control functionality.
⚫

RADIUS-Assigned QoS Enabled
When RADIUS-Assigned QoS is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) on a given
port, the switch reacts to QoS Class information carried in the RADIUS Access-Accept
packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated.
If present and valid, traffic received on the supplicant's port will be classified to the given
QoS Class. If (re-)authentication fails or the RADIUS Access-Accept packet no longer
carries a QoS Class or it's invalid, or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on theport, the port's QoS Class is immediately reverted to the original QoS Class (which may
be changed by the administrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUSassigned).
This option is only available for single-client modes, i.e.
• Port-based 802.1X• Single 802.1X
RADIUS attributes used in identifying a QoS Class:
The User-Priority-Table attribute defined in RFC4675 forms the basis for identifying the
QoS Class in an Access-Accept packet.
Only the first occurrence of the attribute in the packet will be considered, and to be valid,
it must follow this rule:• All 8 octets in the attribute's value must be identical and consist of ASCII characters in
the range '0' - '7', which translates into the desired QoS Class in the range [0; 7].

⚫

RADIUS-Assigned VLAN Enabled
When RADIUS-Assigned VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) for agiven port, the switch reacts to VLAN ID information carried in the RADIUS Access-Accept
packet transmitted by the RADIUS server when a supplicant is successfully authenticated.
If present and valid, the port's Port VLAN ID will be changed to this VLAN ID, the port will
be set to be a member of that VLAN ID, and the port will be forced into VLAN unawaremode. Once assigned, all traffic arriving on the port will be classified and switched on the
RADIUS-assigned VLAN ID.
If (re-)authentication fails or the RADIUS Access-Accept packet no longer carries a VLAN
ID or it's invalid, or the supplicant is otherwise no longer present on the port, the port's
VLAN ID is immediately reverted to the original VLAN ID (which may be changed by theadministrator in the meanwhile without affecting the RADIUS-assigned).
This option is only available for single-client modes, i.e.
• Port-based 802.1X• Single 802.1X
For trouble-shooting VLAN assignments, use the "Monitor→VLANs→VLAN Membershipand VLAN Port" pages. These pages show which modules have (temporarily) overridden
the current Port VLAN configuration.
RADIUS attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID:
RFC2868 and RFC3580 form the basis for the attributes used in identifying a VLAN ID inan Access-Accept packet. The following criteria are used:• The Tunnel-Medium-Type, Tunnel-Type, and Tunnel-Private-Group-ID attributes mustall be present at least once in the Access-Accept packet.
233• The switch looks for the first set of these attributes that have the same Tag value andfulfil the following requirements (if Tag == 0 is used, the Tunnel-Private-Group-ID does
not need to include a Tag):- Value of Tunnel-Medium-Type must be set to "IEEE-802" (ordinal 6).
- Value of Tunnel-Type must be set to "VLAN" (ordinal 13).
- Value of Tunnel-Private-Group-ID must be a string of ASCII chars in the range '0' '9', which is interpreted as a decimal string representing the VLAN ID. Leading '0's are
discarded. The final value must be in the range [1; 4095].
⚫

Guest VLAN Enabled
When Guest VLAN is both globally enabled and enabled (checked) for a given port, theswitch considers moving the port into the Guest VLAN according to the rules outlined below.
This option is only available for EAPOL-based modes, i.e.:• Port-based 802.1X• Single 802.1X• Multi 802.1X
For trouble-shooting VLAN assignments, use the "Monitor→VLANs→VLAN Membership and
VLAN Port" pages. These pages show which modules have (temporarily) overridden thecurrent Port VLAN configuration.
Guest VLAN Operation:
When a Guest VLAN enabled port's link comes up, the switch starts transmitting EAPOL
Request Identity frames. If the number of transmissions of such frames exceeds Max. Reauth.
Count and no EAPOL frames have been received in the meanwhile, the switch considers
entering the Guest VLAN. The interval between transmission of EAPOL Request Identity
frames is configured with EAPOL Timeout. If Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL Seen is enabled, theport will now be placed in the Guest VLAN. If disabled, the switch will first check its history
to see if an EAPOL frame has previously been received on the port (this history is cleared if
the port link goes down or the port's Admin State is changed), and if not, the port will beplaced in the Guest VLAN. Otherwise it will not move to the Guest VLAN, but continuetransmitting EAPOL Request Identity frames at the rate given by EAPOL Timeout.
Once in the Guest VLAN, the port is considered authenticated, and all attached clients on theport are allowed access on this VLAN. The switch will not transmit an EAPOL Success frame
when entering the Guest VLAN.
While in the Guest VLAN, the switch monitors the link for EAPOL frames, and if one suchframe is received, the switch immediately takes the port out of the Guest VLAN and starts
authenticating the supplicant according to the port mode. If an EAPOL frame is received, theport will never be able to go back into the Guest VLAN if the "Allow Guest VLAN if EAPOL
Seen" is disabled.

⚫

Port State :The current state of the port. It can undertake one of the following values:
Globally Disabled: IEEE 802.1X is globally disabled.
Link Down: IEEE 802.1X is globally enabled, but there is no link on the port.
Authorized: The port is in Force Authorized or a single-supplicant mode and the supplicant
is authorized.
Unauthorized: The port is in Force Unauthorized or a single-supplicant mode and the
supplicant is not successfully authorized by the RADIUS server.
X Auth/Y Unauth: The port is in a multi-supplicant mode. Currently X clients are authorized
and Y are unauthorized.

⚫

Restart :Two buttons are available for each row. The buttons are only enabled when authentication is
globally enabled and the port's Admin State is in an EAPOL-based or MAC-based mode.
234

Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect.
Re-authenticate: Schedules a re-authentication whenever the quiet-period of the port runsout (EAPOL-based authentication). For MAC-based authentication, re-authentication will be
attempted immediately.
The button only has effect for successfully authenticated clients on the port and will notcause the clients to get temporarily unauthorized.
Reinitialize: Forces a re-initialization of the clients on the port and thereby a re-authentication
immediately. The clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the re-authentication isin progress.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

235

10-2.2 Status
The section describes to show the each port 802.1X status information of the switch. The status
includes Admin State, Port State, Last Source, Last ID and Port VLAN ID.

Web Interface
To displays 802.1X Status in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, IEEE 802.1X and Status.

2.

Checked “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the port detailed statistics.

4.

You can select which port that you want display 802.1X Statistics.

Figure 10-2.2: The IEEE 802.1X Status

Parameter description:
802.1X Status⚫

Port :The switch port number. Click to navigate to detail 802.1X statistics for this port.

⚫

Admin State :The port's current administrative state. Refer to 802.1X Admin State for a description of
possible values.

⚫

Port State :The current state of the port. Refer to 802.1X Port State for a description of the individualstates.

⚫

Last Source :The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for EAPOL-based
authentication, and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC-based
authentication.

⚫

Last ID :The user name (supplicant identity) carried in the most recently received Response Identity
EAPOL frame for EAPOL-based authentication, and the source MAC address from the mostrecently received frame from a new client for MAC-based authentication.

⚫

QoS Class :QoS Class assigned to the port by the RADIUS server if enabled.

⚫

Port VLAN ID :The VLAN ID that 802.1X has put the port in. The field is blank, if the Port VLAN ID is not236overridden by 802.1X.
If the VLAN ID is assigned by the RADIUS server, "(RADIUS-assigned)" is appended to the
VLAN ID. Read more about RADIUS-assigned VLANs here.
If the port is moved to the Guest VLAN, "(Guest)" is appended to the VLAN ID. Read more
about Guest VLANs here.
Buttons

Figure 10-2.2: The IEEE 802.1X Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

If you select port1 to display 802.1X Statistics.

Figure 10-2.2: The 802.1X Statistics Port 1

Parameter description:⚫

Port :
You can select which port that you want display 802.1X Statistics.

⚫

Admin State :The port's current administrative state. Refer to 802.1X Admin State for a description of
possible values.

⚫

Port State :The current state of the port. Refer to 802.1X Port State for a description of the individualstates.
Buttons

Figure 10-2.2: The IEEE 802.1X Statistics Port buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page.
237

10-3 IP Source Guard
The section describes to configure the IP Source Guard detail parameters of the switch. You
could use the IP Source Guard configure to enable or disable with the Port of the switch.

10-3.1 Configuration
This section describes how to configure IP Source Guard setting including：Mode (Enabled and Disabled)
Maximum Dynamic Clients (0, 1, 2, Unlimited)

Web Interface
To configure an IP Source Guard Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, IP Source Guard and Configuration.

2.

Select “on” in the Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration.

3.

Select “Enabled” of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration.

4.

Select Maximum Dynamic Clients (0, 1, 2, Unlimited) of the specific port in the Mode ofPort Mode Configuration.

5.

Click Apply.

Figure 10-3.1: The IP Source Guard Configuration

Parameter description :⚫

Mode of IP Source Guard Configuration :Enable the Global IP Source Guard or disable the Global IP Source Guard. All configured ACEs
will be lost when the mode is enabled.

⚫

Port Mode Configuration :Specify IP Source Guard is enabled on which ports. Only when both Global Mode and Port
Mode on a given port are enabled, IP Source Guard is enabled on this given port.

⚫

Max Dynamic Clients :Specify the maximum number of dynamic clients that can be learned on given port. Thisvalue can be 0, 1, 2 or unlimited. If the port mode is enabled and the value of max dynamic
client is equal to 0, it means only allow the IP packets forwarding that are matched in static238

entries on the specific port.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

⚫

Translate dynamic to static :Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.

239

10-3.2 Static TableThe section describes to configure the Static IP Source Guard Table parameters of the switch.
You could use the Static IP Source Guard Table configure to manage the entries.

Web Interface
To configure a Static IP Source Guard Table Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, IP Source Guard and Static Table.

2.

Click “Add New Entry”.

3.

Specify the Port, VLAN ID, IP Address, and MAC address in the entry.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 10-3.2: The Static IP Source Guard Table

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The logical port for the settings.

⚫

VLAN ID :The vlan id for the settings.

⚫

IP Address :Allowed Source IP address.

⚫

MAC address :Allowed Source MAC address.
Buttons⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add a new entry to the Static IP Source Guard table. Specify the Port, IP address, and
MAC address for the new entry. Click "Apply".

⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.
240⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

24110-3.3 Dynamic Table
Entries in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table are shown on this page. The Dynamic IP Source
Guard Table is sorted first by port, then by IP address, and then by MAC address.

Web Interface
To configure a Dynamic IP Source Guard Table Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, IP Source Guard and Dynamic Table.

2.

Checked “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the port detailed statistics.

4.

Click First/Next Page to change page.

5.

Specify the Start from port, VLAN, IP Address, and entries per page.

Figure 10-3.3: The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table

Parameter description:
Navigating the IP Source Guard Table :Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic IP Source Guard table, default being 20,
selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show
the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table.
The "Start from port address", "VLAN" and "IP address" input fields allow the user to selectthe starting point in the Dynamic IP Source Guard Table. Clicking “Refresh” the button will
update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic IP Source Guard
Table match. In addition, the two input fields will - upon a “Refresh” button click - assume
the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the same start
address.
The “Next Page” will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next
lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table.
Use the “First Page” button to start over.
⚫

Port :
Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed.

⚫

VLAN ID :VLAN-ID in which the IP traffic is permitted.

⚫

IP Address :User IP address of the entry.

⚫

MAC Address :Source MAC address.
242

⚫

Show entries :You can choose how many items you want to show.
Buttons

Figure 10-3.3: The Dynamic IP Source Guard Table buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

First Page :Updates the system log entries, turn to the first page.

⚫

Next Page :Updates the group information entries, turn to the next page.

243

10-4 ARP Inspection
The section describes to configure the ARP Inspection parameters of the switch. You could
use the ARP Inspection configure to manage the ARP table.

10-4.1 Configuration
This section describes how to configure ARP Inspection setting including：Mode (on and off)
Port (Enabled and Disabled)

Web Interface
To configure an ARP Inspection Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, ARP Inspection and Configuration.

2.

Select “on” in the Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration.

3.

Select “Enabled” of the specific port in the Mode of Port Mode Configuration.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 10-4.1: The ARP Inspection Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Mode of ARP Inspection Configuration :Enable the Global ARP Inspection or disable the Global ARP Inspection.

⚫

Port Mode Configuration :Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which ports. Only when both Global Mode and Port
Mode on a given port are enabled, ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port. Possiblemodes are:Enabled: Enable ARP Inspection operation.
Disabled: Disable ARP Inspection operation.
If you want to inspect the VLAN configuration, you have to enable the setting of "Check
VLAN". The default setting of "Check VLAN" is disabled. When the setting of "Check VLAN"
is disabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the port setting. And the setting of"Check VLAN" is enabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the VLAN setting.
Possible setting of "Check VLAN" are:Enabled: Enable check VLAN operation.
244

Disabled: Disable check VLAN operation.
Only the Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled, and the setting of"Check VLAN" is disabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the port setting.
There are four log types and possible types are:None: Log nothing.
Deny: Log denied entries.
Permit: Log permitted entries.
ALL: Log all entries.
⚫

Check VLAN :If you want to inspect the VLAN configuration, you have to enable the setting of "Check
VLAN". The default setting of "Check VLAN" is disabled. When the setting of "Check VLAN"
is disabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the port setting. And the setting of"Check VLAN" is enabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the VLAN setting.
Possible setting of "Check VLAN" are:Enabled: Enable check VLAN operation.
Disabled: Disable check VLAN operation.

⚫

Log Type :Only the Global Mode and Port Mode on a given port are enabled, and the setting of"Check VLAN" is disabled, the log type of ARP Inspection will refer to the port setting.
There are four log types and possible types are:None: Log nothing.
Deny: Log denied entries.
Permit: Log permitted entries.
ALL: Log all entries.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

⚫

Translate dynamic to static :Click to translate all dynamic entries to static entries.

245

10-4.2 VLAN Configuration
Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which VLANs

Web Interface
To configure a VLAN Mode Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, ARP Inspection and VLAN Configuration.

2.

Click “Add new entry”.

3.

Specify the VLAN ID, Log Type.

4.

Click Apply.

5. Click First Entry/Next Entry to change Entry.

Figure 10-4.2: The VLAN Mode Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Navigating the VLAN Configuration
Each page shows up to 9999 entries from the VLAN table, default being 20, selected
through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show the
first 20 entries from the beginning of the VLAN Table. The first displayed will be the one
with the lowest VLAN ID found in the VLAN Table.
The "VLAN" input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the VLAN Table.
Clicking “Refresh” the button will update the displayed table starting from that or theclosest next VLAN Table match. The “Next Entry” will use the next entry of the currently
displayed VLAN entry as a basis for the next lookup. When the end is reached the warning
message is shown in the displayed table. Use the “First Entry” button to start over.
246

⚫

VLAN Mode Configuration :Specify ARP Inspection is enabled on which VLANs. First, you have to enable the portsetting on Port mode configuration web page. Only when both Global Mode and Port
Mode on a given port are enabled, ARP Inspection is enabled on this given port. Second,
you can specify which VLAN will be inspected on VLAN mode configuration web page. The
log type also can be configured on per VLAN setting.
Possible types are:None: Log nothing.
Deny: Log denied entries.
Permit: Log permitted entries.
ALL: Log all entries.
Buttons⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add a new VLAN to the ARP Inspection VLAN table.

⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

⚫

First Entry :Updates the table starting from the first entry in the IPMC Profile Address Configuration.

⚫

Next Entry :Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

247

10-4.3 Static TableThe section describes to configure the Static ARP Inspection Table parameters of the switch.
You could use the Static ARP Inspection Table configure to manage the ARP entries.

Web Interface
To configure a Static ARP Inspection Table Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, ARP Inspection and Static Table.

2.

Click “Add new entry”.

3.

Specify the Port, VLAN ID, IP Address, MAC address and IP Address in the entry.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure10-4.3: The Static ARP Inspection Table

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The logical port for the settings.

⚫

VLAN ID :The vlan id for the settings.

⚫

MAC Address :Allowed Source MAC address in ARP request packets.

⚫

IP Address :Allowed Source IP address in ARP request packets.
Buttons⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add a new entry to the Static ARP Inspection table.

⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

Apply :
248

Click to save changes.
⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

249

10-4.4 Dynamic Table
Entries in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table are shown on this page. The Dynamic ARP
Inspection Table contains up to 256 entries, and is sorted first by port, then by VLAN ID, thenby MAC address, and then by IP address. All dynamic entries are learning from DHCP
Snooping.
Navigating the ARP Inspection Table
Each page shows up to 99 entries from the Dynamic ARP Inspection table, default being 20,
selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first visited, the web page will show
the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table.
The "Start from port address", "VLAN", "MAC address" and "IP address" input fields allow theuser to select the starting point in the Dynamic ARP Inspection Table. Clicking the “Refresh”
button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next Dynamic ARP
Inspection Table match. In addition, the two input fields will - upon a “Refresh” button click assume the value of the first displayed entry, allowing for continuous refresh with the samestart address.
The “Next Page” will use the last entry of the currently displayed table as a basis for the next
lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table.
Use the “First Page” button to start over.

Web Interface
To configure a Dynamic ARP Inspection Table Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, ARP Inspection and Dynamic Table.

2.

Checked “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the port detailed statistics.

4.

Click First/Next Page to change page.

5.

Specify the Start from port, VLAN, MAC Address, IP Address, and entries per page.

Figure 10-4.4: The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table

Parameter description:
ARP Inspection Table Columns⚫

Port :
Switch Port Number for which the entries are displayed.

⚫

VLAN ID :VLAN ID in which the ARP traffic is permitted.
250

⚫

MAC Address :User MAC address of the entry.

⚫

IP Address :User IP address of the entry.

⚫

Show entries :You can choose how many items you want to show up.
Buttons

Figure 10-4.4: The Dynamic ARP Inspection Table buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

First Page :Updates the system log entries, turn to the first page.

⚫

Next Page :Updates the group information entries, turn to the next page.

251

10-5 Port Security
10-5.1 Configuration
This section shows you to configure the Port Security settings of the Switch. You can use thePort Security feature to restrict input to an interface by limiting and identifying MAC addresses.

Web Interface
To configure a Port Security Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, Port Security and Configuration.

2.

Click to Enable the Aging to specify Aging Period.

3.

Set Mode (Enabled, Disabled), Limit, Violation Mode, Violation Limit for each port.

4.

Click the Apply to save the setting.

5.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

Figure 10-5.1: The Port Security Configuration

Parameter description:
System Configuration⚫

Aging Enabled :If checked, secured MAC addresses are subject to aging as discussed under Aging Period .

⚫

Aging Period :If Aging Enabled is checked, then the aging period is controlled with this input. If othermodules are using the underlying functionality for securing MAC addresses, they may haveother requirements to the aging period. The underlying functionality will use the shorter
requested aging period of all modules that have aging enabled.
The Aging Period can be set to a number between 10 and 10000000seconds with a default
of 3600 seconds.
To understand why aging may be desired, consider the following scenario: Suppose an endhost is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub, which in turn is connected to a port on thisswitch on which Port Security is enabled. The end-host will be allowed to forward if the limit
is not exceeded. Now suppose that the end-host logs off or powers down. If it wasn't foraging, the end-host would still take up resources on this switch and will be allowed to forward.
To overcome this situation, enable aging. With aging enabled, a timer is started once theend-host gets secured. When the timer expires, the switch starts looking for frames from theend-host, and if such frames are not seen within the next Aging Period, the end-host is252

assumed to be disconnected, and the corresponding resources are freed on the switch.
⚫

Hold Time :The hold time - measured in seconds - is used to determine how long a MAC address is heldin the MAC table if it has been found to violate the limit. Valid range is
between 10 and 10000000 seconds with a default of 300 seconds.
The reason for holding a violating MAC address in the MAC table is primarily to ensure thatthe same MAC address doesn't give rise to continuous notifications (if notifications on
violation count is enabled).
Port Configuration
The table has one row for each port on the selected switch and a number of columns, whichare:⚫

Port :The port number to which the configuration below applies.

⚫

Mode :
Controls whether Limit Control is enabled on this port. Both this and the Global Mode must
be set to Enabled for Limit Control to be in effect. Notice that other modules may still use
the underlying port security features without enabling Limit Control on a given port.

⚫

Limit :The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be secured on this port. This number
cannot exceed 1024. If the limit is exceeded, the corresponding action is taken.
The switch is "born" with a total number of MAC addresses from which all ports draw
whenever a new MAC address is seen on a Port Security-enabled port. Since all ports draw
from the same pool, it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted, if theremaining ports have already used all available MAC addresses.

⚫

Violation Mode :If Limit is reached, the switch can take one of the following actions:Protect: Do not allow more than Limit MAC addresses on the port, but take no further action.
Restrict: If Limit is reached, subsequent MAC addresses on the port will be counted andmarked as violating. Such MAC addreses are removed from the MAC table when the holdtime expires. At most Violation Limit MAC addresses can be marked as violating at any given
time.
Shutdown: If Limit is reached, one additional MAC address will cause the port to be shut
down. This implies that all secured MAC addresses be removed from the port, and no new
addresses be learned. There are three ways to re-open the port:
1) In the "Configuration→Ports" page's "Configured" column, first disable the port, thenrestore the original mode.
2) Make a Port Security configuration change on the port.
3) Boot the switch.

⚫

Violation Limit
The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be marked as violating on this port. This
number cannot exceed 1023. Default is 4. It is only used when Violation Mode is Restrict.

⚫

State :
This column shows the current state of the port as seen from the Limit Control's point ofview. The state takes one of four values:
Disabled: Limit Control is either globally disabled or disabled on the port.
Ready: The limit is not yet reached. This can be shown for all actions.
Limit Reached: Indicates that the limit is reached on this port. This state can only be shown253

if Action is set to none or Trap.
Shutdown: Indicates that the port is shut down by the Limit Control module. This state canonly be shown if Action is set to Shutdown or Trap & Shutdown.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

25410-5.2 Status
This section shows the Port Security status. Port Security is a module with no directconfiguration. Configuration comes indirectly from other modules - the user modules. When auser module has enabled port security on a port, the port is set-up for software-based learning.
In this mode, frames from unknown MAC addresses are passed on to the port security module,
which in turn asks all user modules whether to allow this new MAC address to forward or block
it. For a MAC address to be set in the forwarding state, all enabled user modules must
unanimously agree on allowing the MAC address to forward. If only one chooses to block it, it
will be blocked until that user module decides otherwise. The status page is divided into two
sections - one with a legend of user modules and one with the actual port status.

Web Interface
To displays a Port Security Status in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, Port Security and status.

2.

Checked “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the port detailed statistics.

4.

Click the port number to see the status for this particular port.

Figure 10-5.2: The Port Security Status

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The port number for which the status applies. Click the port number to see the status for thisparticular port.

⚫

Violation Mode
Shows the configured Violation Mode of the port. It can take one of four values:
Disabled: Port Security is not administratively enabled on this port.
Protect: Port Security is administratively enabled in Protect mode.
Restrict: Port Security is administratively enabled in Restrict mode.
Shutdown: Port Security is administratively enabled in Shutdown mode.

⚫

State :
Shows the current state of the port. It can take one of four values:
Disabled: No user modules are currently using the Port Security service.
Ready: The Port Security service is in use by at least one user module, and is awaiting frames
from unknown MAC addresses to arrive.
Limit Reached: The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module,
and that module has indicated that the limit is reached and no more MAC addresses should
be taken in.
255

Shutdown: The Port Security service is enabled by at least the Limit Control user module,
and that module has indicated that the limit is exceeded. No MAC addresses can be learnedon the port until it is administratively re-opened on the Limit Control configuration Webpage.
⚫

MAC Count (Current, Violating, Limit)
The three columns indicate the number of currently learned MAC addresses (forwarding aswell as blocked), the number of violating MAC address (only counting in Restrict mode) andthe maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port, respectively.
If no user modules are enabled on the port, the Current column will show a dash (-).
If Port Security is not administratively enabled on the port, the Violating and Limit columns
will show a dash (-).
Buttons

Figure 10-5.2: The Port Security Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

◼

Click the port number to see the status for this particular port.

Figure 10-5.2: The Port Security Status

Parameter description:⚫

MAC Address & VLAN ID :The MAC address and VLAN ID that is seen on this port. If no MAC addresses are learned, asingle row stating "No MAC addresses attached" is displayed.

⚫

State :
Indicates whether the corresponding MAC address is blocked or forwarding. In the blocked
state, it will not be allowed to transmit or receive traffic.

⚫

Time of Addition :Shows the date and time when this MAC address was first seen on the port.

⚫

Age/Hold :If at least one user module has decided to block this MAC address, it will stay in the blocked
state until the hold time (measured in seconds) expires. If all user modules have decided toallow this MAC address to forward, and aging is enabled, the Port Security module will
periodically check that this MAC address still forwards traffic. If the age period (measured in256seconds) expires and no frames have been seen, the MAC address will be removed from the
MAC table. Otherwise a new age period will begin.
If aging is disabled or a user module has decided to hold the MAC address indefinitely, adash (-) will be shown.
Buttons

Figure 10-5.2: The Port Security Status Buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

Clear :
Click to remove this particular MAC addresses from MAC table.

⚫

Port 1 :Select port that you want to display the Port Security Status.

⚫

Back :
Click to go back Port Security Status.

257

10-6 RADIUS
10-6.1 Configuration
Web Interface
To configure a RADIUS in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, RADIUS and Configuration.

2.

Set Timeout, Retransmit, Deadtime, Key, NAS-IP-Address, NAS IPv6-Address, NASIdentifier.

3.

Click “Add New Entry”.

4.

Set Hostname, Auth Port, Acct Port, Timeout, Retransmit, Key.

5.

Click the Apply to save the setting.

6.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

Figure 100-6.1: The RADIUS Configuration

Parameter description:
Global Configuration
These setting are common for all of the RADIUS servers.
⚫

Timeout :258

Timeout is the number of seconds, in the range 1 to 1000, to wait for a reply from a RADIUS
server before retransmitting the request.
⚫

Retransmit :Retransmit is the number of times, in the range 1 to 1000, a RADIUS request is retransmitted
to a server that is not responding. If the server has not responded after the last retransmit it
is considered to be dead.

⚫

Deadtime :Deadtime, which can be set to a number between 0 to 1440 minutes, is the period during
which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to aprevious request. This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it
has already determined as dead.
Setting the Deadtime to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this feature, but only if morethan one server has been configured.

⚫

Key :
The secret key - up to 63 characters long - shared between the RADIUS server and the switch.

⚫

NAS-IP-Address :The IPv4 address to be used as attribute 4 in RADIUS Access-Request packets. If this field isleft blank, the IP address of the outgoing interface is used.

⚫

NAS-IPv6-Address :The IPv6 address to be used as attribute 95 in RADIUS Access-Request packets. If this field isleft blank, the IP address of the outgoing interface is used.

⚫

NAS-Identifier :The identifier - up to 255 characters long - to be used as attribute 32 in RADIUS AccessRequest packets. If this field is left blank, the NAS-Identifier is not included in the packet.
Server Configuration
The table has one row for each RADIUS server and a number of columns, which are:⚫

Hostname :The IP address or hostname of the RADIUS server.

⚫

Auth Port :The UDP port to use on the RADIUS server for authentication.

⚫

Acct Port :The UDP port to use on the RADIUS server for accounting.

⚫

Timeout :This optional setting overrides the global timeout value. Leaving it blank will use the global
timeout value.

⚫

Retransmit :This optional setting overrides the global retransmit value. Leaving it blank will use the global
retransmit value.

⚫

Key :
This optional setting overrides the global key. Leaving it blank will use the global key.
Buttons⚫

Delete :259

To delete a RADIUS server entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted during the next
Save.
⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add a new RADIUS server. An empty row is added to the table, and the RADIUS server
can be configured as needed. Up to 5 servers are supported.
The button can be used to undo the addition of the new server.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

260

10-6.2 Status
This section shows you an overview/detail of the RADIUS Authentication and Accounting
servers’ status to ensure the function is workable.

Web Interface
To display a RADIUS Status in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, RADIUS and Status.

2.

Select server to display the detail statistics for a particular RADIUS

Figure 10-6.2: The RADIUS Server Status Overview

Parameter description:⚫

#:
The RADIUS server number. Click to navigate to detailed statistics for this server.

⚫

IP Address :The IP address and UDP port number (in <IP Address>:<UDP Port> notation) of this server.

⚫

Authentication Port :UDP port number for authentication.

⚫

Authentication Status :The current status of the server. This field takes one of the following values:
Disabled: The server is disabled.
Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.
Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS
module is ready to accept access attempts.
Dead (X seconds left): Access attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply
within the configured timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get reenabled when the dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is
displayed in parentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server isenabled.

⚫

Accounting Port :UDP port number for accounting.

⚫

Accounting Status :The current status of the server. This field takes one of the following values:261

Disabled: The server is disabled.
Not Ready: The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.
Ready: The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS
module is ready to accept access attempts.
Dead (X seconds left): Access attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply
within the configured timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get reenabled when the dead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is
displayed in parentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server isenabled.
Buttons

Figure 10-6.2: The RADIUS Server Status Buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

Figure 11-6.2: The RADIUS Statistics for Server

Parameter description:⚫

server :You can select which server that you want to display RADIUS.
RADIUS Authentication Statistics for Server #1
The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4668 - RADIUS Authentication Client MIB.
Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for.
262

⚫

Access Accepts :The number of RADIUS Access-Accept packets (valid or invalid) received from the server.

⚫

Access Rejects :The number of RADIUS Access-Reject packets (valid or invalid) received from the server.

⚫

Access Challenges :The number of RADIUS Access-Challenge packets (valid or invalid) received from the server.

⚫

Malformed Access Responses :The number of malformed RADIUS Access-Response packets received from the server.
Malformed packets include packets with an invalid length. Bad authenticators or Message
Authenticator attributes or unknown types are not included as malformed access responses.

⚫

Bad Authenticators :The number of RADIUS Access-Response packets containing invalid authenticators or
Message Authenticator attributes received from the server.

⚫

Unknown Types :The number of RADIUS packets that were received with unknown types from the server on
the authentication port and dropped.

⚫

Packets Dropped :The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the authentication
port and dropped for some other reason.

⚫

Access Requests :The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets sent to the server. This does not include
retransmissions.

⚫

Access Retransmissions :The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets retransmitted to the RADIUS authentication
server.

⚫

Pending Requests :The number of RADIUS Access-Request packets destined for the server that have not yet
timed out or received a response. This variable is incremented when an Access-Request issent and decremented due to receipt of an Access-Accept, Access-Reject, Access-Challenge,
timeout, or retransmission.

⚫

Timeouts :The number of authentication timeouts to the server. After a timeout, the client may retry to
the same server, send to a different server, or give up. A retry to the same server is counted
as a retransmit as well as a timeout. A send to a different server is counted as a Request as
well as a timeout.

⚫

IP Address :IP address and UDP port for the authentication server in question.

⚫

State :
Shows the state of the server. It takes one of the following values:◼

Disabled :The selected server is disabled.

◼

Not Ready :263

The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.
◼

Ready :The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS module isready to accept access attempts.

◼

Dead (X seconds left) :Access attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply within the configured
timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get re-enabled when thedead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed inparentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled.

⚫

Round-Trip Time :The time interval (measured in milliseconds) between the most recent Access-Reply/AccessChallenge and the Access-Request that matched it from the RADIUS authentication server.
The granularity of this measurement is 100 ms. A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn't
been round-trip communication with the server yet.
RADIUS Accounting Statistics for Server #1
The statistics map closely to those specified in RFC4670 - RADIUS Accounting Client MIB.
Use the server select box to switch between the backend servers to show details for.

⚫

Responses :The number of RADIUS packets (valid or invalid) received from the server.

⚫

Malformed Responses :The number of malformed RADIUS packets received from the server. Malformed packets
include packets with an invalid length. Bad authenticators or unknown types are not included
as malformed access responses.

⚫

Bad Authenticators :The number of RADIUS packets containing invalid authenticators received from the server.

⚫

Unknown Types :The number of RADIUS packets of unknown types that were received from the server on theaccounting port.

⚫

Packets Dropped :The number of RADIUS packets that were received from the server on the accounting port
and dropped for some other reason.

⚫

Requests :The number of RADIUS packets sent to the server. This does not include retransmissions⚫

Retransmissions :The number of RADIUS packets retransmitted to the RADIUS accounting server.

⚫

Pending Requests :The number of RADIUS packets destined for the server that have not yet timed out or
received a response. This variable is incremented when a Request is sent and decremented
due to receipt of a Response, timeout, or retransmission.

⚫

Timeouts :The number of accounting timeouts to the server. After a timeout, the client may retry to thesame server, send to a different server, or give up. A retry to the same server is counted as aretransmit as well as a timeout. A send to a different server is counted as a Request as well
as a timeout.
264

⚫

IP Address :IP address and UDP port for the accounting server in question.

⚫

State :
Shows the state of the server. It takes one of the following values:
Disabled :◼

The selected server is disabled.
Not Ready :◼

The server is enabled, but IP communication is not yet up and running.
Ready :◼

The server is enabled, IP communication is up and running, and the RADIUS module isready to accept accounting attempts.
Dead (X seconds left) :◼

Accounting attempts were made to this server, but it did not reply within the configured
timeout. The server has temporarily been disabled, but will get re-enabled when thedead-time expires. The number of seconds left before this occurs is displayed inparentheses. This state is only reachable when more than one server is enabled.
⚫

Round-Trip Time :The time interval (measured in milliseconds) between the most recent Response and theRequest that matched it from the RADIUS accounting server. The granularity of thismeasurement is 100 ms. A value of 0 ms indicates that there hasn't been round-trip
communication with the server yet.
Buttons

Figure 10-6.2: The RADIUS Server Status for Server Buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

Clear :
Clears the counters for the selected server. The "Pending Requests" counter will not becleared by this operation.

26510-7 TACACS+
This page allows you to configure up to 5 TACACS+servers.

Web Interface
To configure the TACACS+ servers in the web interface:
1.

Click Security and TACACS+.

2.

Click “Add New Entry”.

3.

Specify the Timeout, Deadtime, Key.

4.

Specify the Hostname, Port, Timeout and Key in the server.

5.

Click Apply.

Figure 10-7: The TACACS+ Server Configuration

Parameter description:
Global Configuration
These setting are common for all of the TACACS+ servers.
266

⚫

Timeout :Timeout is the number of seconds, in the range 1 to 1000, to wait for a reply from a TACACS+
server before it is considered to be dead.

⚫

Deadtime :Deadtime, which can be set to a number between 0 to 1440 minutes, is the period during
which the switch will not send new requests to a server that has failed to respond to aprevious request. This will stop the switch from continually trying to contact a server that it
has already determined as dead.
Setting the Deadtime to a value greater than 0 (zero) will enable this feature, but only if morethan one server has been configured.

⚫

Key :
The secret key - up to 63 characters long - shared between the TACACS+ server and theswitch.
Server Configuration
The table has one row for each TACACS+ server and a number of columns, which are:⚫

Delete :To delete a TACACS+ server entry, check this box. The entry will be deleted during the next
Save.

⚫

Hostname :The IP address or hostname of the TACACS+ server.

⚫

Port :The TCP port to use on the TACACS+ server for authentication.

⚫

Timeout :This optional setting overrides the global timeout value. Leaving it blank will use the global
timeout value.

⚫

Key :
This optional setting overrides the global key. Leaving it blank will use the global key.
Buttons⚫

Delete :This button can be used to undo the addition of the new server.

⚫

Add New Server :Click to add a new TACACS+ server. An empty row is added to the table, and the TACACS+
server can be configured as needed. Up to 5 servers are supported.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

267Chapter 11

Access Control

11-1 Ports Configuration
Configure the ACL parameters (ACE) of each switch port. These parameters will affect frames
received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE.

Web Interface
To configure the ACL Ports Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Access Control and Port Configuration.

2.

To scroll the specific parameter value to select the correct value for port ACL setting.

3.

Click the apply to save the setting

4.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

5.

After you configure complete then you could see the Counter of the port. Then you could
click refresh to update the counter or Clear the information.

Figure 11-1: The ACL Ports Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

⚫

Policy ID :Select the policy to apply to this port. The allowed values are 1 through 8. The default value
is 1.
268

⚫

Action :Select whether forwarding is permitted ("Permit") or denied ("Deny"). The default value is"Permit".

⚫

Rate Limiter ID :Select which rate limiter to apply on this port. The allowed values are Disabled or the values
1 through 16. The default value is "Disabled".

⚫

Port Redirect :Select which port frames are redirected on. The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port
number and it can't be set when action is permitted. The default value is "Disabled".

⚫

MirrorSpecify the mirror operation of this port. The allowed values are:Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.
The default value is "Disabled".

⚫

Logging :Specify the logging operation of this port. The allowed values are:Enabled: Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log.
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not logged.
The default value is "Disabled". Please note that the System Log memory size and logging
rate is limited.

⚫

Shutdown :Specify the port shut down operation of this port. The allowed values are:Enabled: If a frame is received on the port, the port will be disabled.
Disabled: Port shut down is disabled.
The default value is "Disabled".

⚫

State :
Specify the port state of this port. The allowed values are:Enabled: To reopen ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module.
Disabled: To close ports by changing the volatile port configuration of the ACL user module.
The default value is "Enabled"⚫

Counter :Counts the number of frames that match this ACE.
Buttons⚫

Refresh, clear :You can click them for refresh the ACL Port Configuration or clear them by manual.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

269

11-2 Rate Limiters
The section describes how to configure the switch’s ACL Rate Limiter parameters. The Rate
Limiter Level from 1 to 16 that allow user to set rate limiter value and units with pps.

Web Interface
To configure ACL Rate Limiter in the web interface:
1.

Click Access Control and Rate Limiters.

2.

To specific the Rate field, Unit.

3.

Click the Apply to save the setting

4.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

Figure 11-2: The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Rate Limiter ID :The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row and its range is 1 to 16.

⚫

Rate :The valid rate is 0, 10, 20, 30, ..., 5000000 in pps
or 0, 25, 50, 75, ..., 10000000 in kbps.

⚫

Unit
Specify the rate unit. The allowed values are:10pps: packets per second.
25kbps: Kbits per second.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
270

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

271

11-3 Access Control List
This page shows the Access Control List (ACL), which is made up of the ACEs defined on thisswitch. Each row describes the ACE that is defined. The maximum number of ACEs is 512 oneach switch.
Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list. The reserved ACEs used for internal
protocol, cannot be edited or deleted, the order sequence cannot be changed and the priority
is highest.

Web Interface
To configure Access Control List in the web interface:
1.

Click Access Control and Access Control List.

2.

Click thebutton to add a new ACL, or use the other ACL modification buttons to
specify the editing action (i.e., edit, delete, or moving the relative position of entry in the
list)

3.

To specific the parameter of the ACE

4.

Click the save to save the setting

5.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

6.

When editing an entry on the ACE Configuration page, note that the Items displayed
depend on various selections, such as Frame Type and IP Protocol Type. Specify therelevant criteria to be matched for this rule, and set the actions to take when a rule ismatched (such as Rate Limiter, Port Copy, Logging, and Shutdown).

Figure 11-3: The Access Control List Configuration

272

Parameter description:⚫

ACE :Indicates the ACE ID.

⚫

Ingress Port :Indicates the ingress port of the ACE. Possible values are:Any: The ACE will match any ingress port.
Policy: The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy.
Port: The ACE will match a specific ingress port.

⚫

Policy / Bitmask :Indicates the policy number and bitmask of the ACE.

⚫

Frame Type :Indicates the frame type of the ACE. Possible values are:Any: The ACE will match any frame type.
EType: The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames. Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will
not get matched by IP and ARP frames.
ARP: The ACE will match ARP/RARP frames.
IPv4: The ACE will match all IPv4 frames.
IPv4/ICMP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol.
IPv4/UDP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol.
IPv4/TCP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol.
IPv4/Other: The ACE will match IPv4 frames, which are not ICMP/UDP/TCP.
IPv6: The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames.

⚫

Action :Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.
Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.
Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.
Filter: Frames matching the ACE are filtered.

⚫

Rate Limiter :Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE. The allowed range is 1 to 16. When Disabled isdisplayed, the rate limiter operation is disabled.

⚫

Port Redirect :Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE. Frames matching the ACE are redirected tothe port number. The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number.
When Disabled is displayed, the port redirect operation is disabled.

⚫

Mirror :Specify the mirror operation of this port. Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to thedestination mirror port. The allowed values are:Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.
The default value is "Disabled".
273

⚫

Counter :The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.

⚫

Modification Buttons :You can modify each ACE (Access Control Entry) in the table using the following buttons:: Inserts a new ACE before the current row.
: Edits the ACE row.
: Moves the ACE up the list.
: Moves the ACE down the list.
: Deletes the ACE.
: The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings.

ACE Configuration
An ACE consists of several parameters. These parameters vary according to the frame typethat you select. First select the ingress port for the ACE, and then select the frame type.
Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type selected.
A frame that hits this ACE matches the configuration that is defined here.
⚫

Ingress Port :Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies.
All: The ACE applies to all port.
Port n: The ACE applies to this port number, where n is the number of the switch port.

⚫

Policy Filter :Specify the policy number filter for this ACE.
Any: No policy filter is specified. (policy filter status is "don't-care".)Specific: If you want to filter a specific policy with this ACE, choose this value. Two field forentering an policy value and bitmask appears.

⚫

Policy Value :When "Specific" is selected for the policy filter, you can enter a specific policy value. The
allowed range is 0 to 255.

⚫

Policy Bitmask :When "Specific" is selected for the policy filter, you can enter a specific policy bitmask. The
allowed range is 0x0 to 0xff. Notice the usage of bitmask, if the binary bit value is "0", itmeans this bit is "don't-care". The real matched pattern is [policy_value & policy_bitmask].
For example, if the policy value is 3 and the policy bitmask is 0x10(bit 0 is "don't-care" bit),then policy 2 and 3 are applied to this rule.

⚫

Frame Type :Select the frame type for this ACE. These frame types are mutually exclusive.
Any: Any frame can match this ACE.
Ethernet Type: Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE. The IEEE 802.3 describes thevalue of Length/Type Field specifications to be greater than or equal to 1536 decimal (equal
to 0600 hexadecimal).
ARP: Only ARP frames can match this ACE. Notice the ARP frames won't match the ACE withethernet type.
IPv4: Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE. Notice the IPv4 frames won't match the ACE withethernet type.
IPv6: Only IPv6 frames can match this ACE. Notice the IPv6 frames won't match the ACE with
Ethernet type.
274

⚫

Action :Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE.
Permit: The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation.
Deny: The frame that hits this ACE is dropped.
Filter: Frames matching the ACE are filtered.

⚫

Rate Limiter :Specify the rate limiter in number of base units. The allowed range is 1 to 16. Disabledindicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled.

⚫

Port Redirect :Frames that hit the ACE are redirected to the port number specified here. The rate limiter willaffect these ports. The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range. Disabledindicates that the port redirect operation is disabled and the specific port number of 'Port
Redirect' can't be set when action is permitted.

⚫

Mirror :Specify the mirror operation of this port. Frames matching the ACE are mirrored to thedestination mirror port. The rate limiter will not affect frames on the mirror port. The allowed
values are:Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.
The default value is "Disabled".

⚫

Logging :Specify the logging operation of the ACE. Notice that the logging message doesn't include
the 4 bytes CRC information. The allowed values are:Enabled: Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log.
Disabled: Frames matching the ACE are not logged.
Note: The logging feature only works when the packet length is less than 1518(without VLAN
tags) and the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited.

⚫

Shutdown :Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE. The allowed values are:Enabled: If a frame matches the ACE, the ingress port will be disabled.
Disabled: Port shut down is disabled for the ACE.
Note: The shutdown feature only works when the packet length is less than 1518(without
VLAN tags).

⚫

Counter :The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.
MAC Parameter⚫

SMAC Filter :(Only displayed when the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP.)
Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE.
Any: No SMAC filter is specified. (SMAC filter status is "don't-care".)Specific: If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE, choose this value.
275

A field for entering an SMAC value appears.
⚫

SMAC Value :When "Specific" is selected for the SMAC filter, you can enter a specific source MAC address.
The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx" or "xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx" or "xxxxxxxxxxxx" (x is ahexadecimal digit). A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC value.

⚫

DMAC Filter :Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE.
Any: No DMAC filter is specified. (DMAC filter status is "don't-care".)MC: Frame must be multicast.
BC: Frame must be broadcast.
UC: Frame must be unicast.
Specific: If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE, choose thisvalue. A field for entering a DMAC value appears.

⚫

DMAC Value :When "Specific" is selected for the DMAC filter, you can enter a specific destination MAC
address. The legal format is "xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx" or "xx.xx.xx.xx.xx.xx" or "xxxxxxxxxxxx" (x is ahexadecimal digit). A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value.
VLAN Parameters⚫

802.1Q Tagged :Specify whether frames can hit the action according to the 802.1Q tagged. The allowed
values are:Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Enabled: Tagged frame only.
Disabled: Untagged frame only.
The default value is "Any".

⚫

VLAN ID Filter :Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE.
Any: No VLAN ID filter is specified. (VLAN ID filter status is "don't-care".)Specific: If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE, choose this value. A field forentering a VLAN ID number appears.

⚫

VLAN ID :When "Specific" is selected for the VLAN ID filter, you can enter a specific VLAN ID number.
The allowed range is 1 to 4095. A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN ID value.

⚫

Tag Priority :Specify the tag priority for this ACE. A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority. The
allowed number range is 0 to 7 or range 0-1, 2-3, 4-5, 6-7, 0-3 and 4-7. The value Any meansthat no tag priority is specified (tag priority is "don't-care".)ARP Parameters
The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type "ARP" is selected.

⚫

ARP/RARP :Specify the available ARP/RARP opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.
276

Any: No ARP/RARP OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care".)
ARP: Frame must have ARP opcode set to ARP.
RARP: Frame must have RARP opcode set to RARP.
Other: Frame has unknown ARP/RARP Opcode flag.
⚫

Request/Reply :Specify the available Request/Reply opcode (OP) flag for this ACE.
Any: No Request/Reply OP flag is specified. (OP is "don't-care".)Request: Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set.
Reply: Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag.

⚫

Sender IP Filter :Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE.
Any: No sender IP filter is specified. (Sender IP filter is "don't-care".)Host: Sender IP filter is set to Host. Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field thatappears.
Network: Sender IP filter is set to Network. Specify the sender IP address and sender IP maskin the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.

⚫

Sender IP Address :When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a specific sender
IP address in dotted decimal notation.

⚫

Sender IP Mask :When "Network" is selected for the sender IP filter, you can enter a specific sender IP mask
in dotted decimal notation.

⚫

Target IP Filter :Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE.
Any: No target IP filter is specified. (Target IP filter is "don't-care".)Host: Target IP filter is set to Host. Specify the target IP address in the Target IP Address fieldthat appears. Network: Target IP filter is set to Network. Specify the target IP address andtarget IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear.

⚫

Target IP Address :When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a specific target
IP address in dotted decimal notation.

⚫

Target IP Mask :When "Network" is selected for the target IP filter, you can enter a specific target IP mask indotted decimal notation.

⚫

ARP Sender MAC Match :Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field(SHA) settings.
0: ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address.
1: ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

⚫

RARP Target MAC Match :277

Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware address field(THA) settings.
0: RARP frames where THA is not equal to the target MAC address.
1: RARP frames where THA is equal to the target MAC address.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
⚫

IP/Ethernet Length :Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP hardware address
length (HLN) and protocol address length (PLN) settings.
0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is not equal to Ethernet (0x06) or the (PLN) is not equal
to IPv4 (0x04).
1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet (0x06) and the (PLN) is equal to IPv4
(0x04).
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

⚫

Ethernet :Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP hardware address
space (HRD) settings.
0: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is not equal to Ethernet (1).
1: ARP/RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet (1).
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

⚫

IP :Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP/RARP protocol address
space (PRO) settings.
0: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is not equal to IP (0x800).
1: ARP/RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP (0x800).
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
IP Parameters
The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type "IPv4" is selected.

⚫

IP Protocol Filter :Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE.
Any: No IP protocol filter is specified ("don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE, choose this value. A
field for entering an IP protocol filter appears.
ICMP: Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining ICMP
parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.
UDP: Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining UDP parameters
will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.
TCP: Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining TCP parameters
will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.

⚫

IP Protocol Value :When "Specific" is selected for the IP protocol value, you can enter a specific value. The
allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value.

⚫

IP TTL :278

Specify the Time-to-Live settings for this ACE.
zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must not be able to match thisentry.
non-zero: IPv4 frames with a Time-to-Live field greater than zero must be able to match thisentry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
⚫

IP Fragment :Specify the fragment offset settings for this ACE. This involves the settings for the More
Fragments (MF) bit and the Fragment Offset (FRAG OFFSET) field for an IPv4 frame.
No: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero mustnot be able to match this entry.
Yes: IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must
be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

⚫

IP Option :Specify the options flag setting for this ACE.
No: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry.
Yes: IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

⚫

SIP Filter :Specify the source IP filter for this ACE.
Any: No source IP filter is specified. (Source IP filter is "don't-care".)Host: Source IP filter is set to Host. Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field thatappears.
Network: Source IP filter is set to Network. Specify the source IP address and source IP maskin the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear.

⚫

SIP Address :When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific SIP
address in dotted decimal notation.

⚫

SIP Mask :When "Network" is selected for the source IP filter, you can enter a specific SIP mask in dotted
decimal notation.

⚫

DIP Filter :Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE.
Any: No destination IP filter is specified. (Destination IP filter is "don't-care".)Host: Destination IP filter is set to Host. Specify the destination IP address in the DIP Address
field that appears.
Network: Destination IP filter is set to Network. Specify the destination IP address anddestination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear.

⚫

DIP Address :When "Host" or "Network" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a specific
DIP address in dotted decimal notation.
279

⚫

DIP Mask :When "Network" is selected for the destination IP filter, you can enter a specific DIP mask indotted decimal notation.
IPv6 Parameters
The IPv6 parameters can be configured when Frame Type "IPv6" is selected.

⚫

Next Header Filter :Specify the IPv6 next header filter for this ACE.
Any: No IPv6 next header filter is specified ("don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific IPv6 next header filter with this ACE, choose this value.
A field for entering an IPv6 next header filter appears.
ICMP: Select ICMP to filter IPv6 ICMP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining ICMP
parameters will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.
UDP: Select UDP to filter IPv6 UDP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining UDP parameters
will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.
TCP: Select TCP to filter IPv6 TCP protocol frames. Extra fields for defining TCP parameters
will appear. These fields are explained later in this help file.

⚫

Next Header Value :When "Specific" is selected for the IPv6 next header value, you can enter a specific value. The
allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this IPv6 protocol value.

⚫

SIP Filter :Specify the source IPv6 filter for this ACE.
Any: No source IPv6 filter is specified. (Source IPv6 filter is "don't-care".)Specific: Source IPv6 filter is set to Network. Specify the source IPv6 address and source IPv6
mask in the SIP Address fields that appear.

⚫

SIP Address :When "Specific" is selected for the source IPv6 filter, you can enter a specific SIPv6 address.
The field only supported last 32 bits for IPv6 address.

⚫

SIP BitMask :When "Specific" is selected for the source IPv6 filter, you can enter a specific SIPv6 mask. The
field only supported last 32 bits for IPv6 address. Notice the usage of bitmask, if the binary
bit value is "0", it means this bit is "don't-care". The real matched pattern is [sipv6_address &sipv6_bitmask] (last 32 bits). For example, if the SIPv6 address is 2001::3 and the SIPv6
bitmask is 0xFFFFFFFE(bit 0 is "don't-care" bit), then SIPv6 address 2001::2 and 2001::3 areapplied to this rule.

⚫

Hop Limit :Specify the hop limit settings for this ACE.
zero: IPv6 frames with a hop limit field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry.
non-zero: IPv6 frames with a hop limit field greater than zero must be able to match thisentry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
ICMP Parameters⚫

ICMP Type Filter :Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE.
280

Any: No ICMP filter is specified (ICMP filter status is "don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific ICMP
value. A field for entering an ICMP value appears.
⚫

ICMP Type Value :When "Specific" is selected for the ICMP filter, you can enter a specific ICMP value. The
allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP value.

⚫

ICMP Code Filter :Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE.
Any: No ICMP code filter is specified (ICMP code filter status is "don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific
ICMP code value. A field for entering an ICMP code value appears.

⚫

ICMP Code Value :When "Specific" is selected for the ICMP code filter, you can enter a specific ICMP code value.
The allowed range is 0 to 255. A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value.
TCP/UDP Parameters⚫

TCP/UDP Source Filter :Specify the TCP/UDP source filter for this ACE.
Any: No TCP/UDP source filter is specified (TCP/UDP source filter status is "don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP source filter with this ACE, you can enter a
specific TCP/UDP source value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP source value appears.
Range: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP source range filter with this ACE, you can entera specific TCP/UDP source range value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP source value appears.

⚫

TCP/UDP Source No. :When "Specific" is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP
source value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches thisTCP/UDP source value.

⚫

TCP/UDP Source Range :When "Range" is selected for the TCP/UDP source filter, you can enter a specific TCP/UDP
source range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE matches thisTCP/UDP source value.

⚫

TCP/UDP Destination Filter :Specify the TCP/UDP destination filter for this ACE.
Any: No TCP/UDP destination filter is specified (TCP/UDP destination filter status is "don'tcare").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific TCP/UDP destination filter with this ACE, you can entera specific TCP/UDP destination value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP destination value
appears.
Range: If you want to filter a specific range TCP/UDP destination filter with this ACE, you canenter a specific TCP/UDP destination range value. A field for entering a TCP/UDP destination
value appears.

⚫

TCP/UDP Destination Number :When "Specific" is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a specific
TCP/UDP destination value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE
matches this TCP/UDP destination value.
281

⚫

TCP/UDP Destination Range :When "Range" is selected for the TCP/UDP destination filter, you can enter a specific
TCP/UDP destination range value. The allowed range is 0 to 65535. A frame that hits this ACE
matches this TCP/UDP destination value.

⚫

TCP FIN :Specify the TCP "No more data from sender" (FIN) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry.
1: TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

⚫

TCP SYN :Specify the TCP "Synchronize sequence numbers" (SYN) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry.
1: TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

⚫

TCP RST :Specify the TCP "Reset the connection" (RST) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the RST field is set must not be able to match this entry.
1: TCP frames where the RST field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

⚫

TCP PSH :Specify the TCP "Push Function" (PSH) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry.
1: TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

⚫

TCP ACK :Specify the TCP "Acknowledgment field significant" (ACK) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry.
1: TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").

⚫

TCP URG :Specify the TCP "Urgent Pointer field significant" (URG) value for this ACE.
0: TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry.
1: TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry.
Any: Any value is allowed ("don't-care").
Ethernet Type Parameters
The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type "Ethernet Type" isselected.

⚫

EtherType Filter :Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE.
282

Any: No EtherType filter is specified (EtherType filter status is "don't-care").
Specific: If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE, you can enter a specific
EtherType value. A field for entering a EtherType value appears.
⚫

Ethernet Type Value :When "Specific" is selected for the EtherType filter, you can enter a specific EtherType value.
The allowed range is 0x600 to 0xFFFF but excluding 0x800(IPv4), 0x806(ARP) and
0x86DD(IPv6). A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

⚫

Auto-refresh :To evoke the auto-refresh to refresh the information automatically.

⚫

Refresh, clear, Remove All :You can click them for refresh the ACL configuration or clear them by manual. Others remove
all to clean up all ACL configurations on the table.

⚫

Cancel :Return to the previous page.

283

11-4 ACL Status
The section describes how to shows the ACL status by different ACL users. Each row describes
the ACE that is defined. It is a conflict if a specific ACE is not applied to the hardware due tohardware limitations. The maximum number of ACEs is 512 on each switch.

Web Interface
To display the ACL status in the web interface:
1.

Click Access Control and ACL status

2.

If you want to auto-refresh the information then you need to evoke the “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh“ to refresh the ACL Status.

Figure 11-4: The ACL Status

Parameter description:⚫

User :
Indicates the ACL user.

⚫

ACE :
Indicates the ACE ID on local switch.

⚫

Ingress Port :Indicates the ingress port of the ACE. Possible values are:
All: The ACE will match all ingress port.
Port: The ACE will match a specific ingress port.

⚫

Frame Type :Indicates the frame type of the ACE. Possible values are:Any: The ACE will match any frame type.
EType: The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames. Note that an Ethernet Type based ACE will
not get matched by IP and ARP frames.
ARP: The ACE will match ARP/RARP frames.
IPv4: The ACE will match all IPv4 frames.
IPv4: The ACE will match all IPv4 frames.
IPv4/ICMP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol.
IPv4/UDP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol.
IPv4/TCP: The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol.
IPv4/Other: The ACE will match IPv4 frames, which are not ICMP / UDP / TCP.
284

IPv6: The ACE will match all IPv6 standard frames.
⚫

Action :Indicates the forwarding action of the ACE.
Permit: Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned.
Deny: Frames matching the ACE are dropped.
Filter: Frames matching the ACE are filtered.

⚫

Rate Limiter :Indicates the rate limiter number of the ACE. The allowed range is 1 to 16. When Disabled isdisplayed, the rate limiter operation is disabled.

⚫

Port Redirect :Indicates the port redirect operation of the ACE. Frames matching the ACE are redirected tothe port number. The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number.
When Disabled is displayed, the port redirect operation is disabled.

⚫

Mirror :Specify the mirror operation of this port. The allowed values are:Enabled: Frames received on the port are mirrored.
Disabled: Frames received on the port are not mirrored.
The default value is "Disabled".

⚫

CPU :
Forward packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU.

⚫

CPU Once :Forward first packet that matched the specific ACE to CPU.

⚫

Counter :The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame.

⚫

Conflict :Indicates the hardware status of the specific ACE. The specific ACE is not applied to thehardware due to hardware limitations.
Buttons

Figure 11-4: The ACL Status Buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

285

Chapter 12

SNMP

Any Network Management System (NMS) running the Simple Network Management Protocol(SNMP) can manage the Managed devices equipped with SNMP agent, provided that theManagement Information Base (MIB) is installed correctly on the managed devices. The SNMP
is a protocol that is used to govern the transfer of information between SNMP manager andagent and traverses the Object Identity (OID) of the management Information Base (MIB),
described in the form of SMI syntax. SNMP agent is running on the switch to response therequest issued by SNMP manager.
Basically, it is passive except issuing the trap information. The switch supports a switch to turnon or off the SNMP agent. If you set the field SNMP “Enable”, SNMP agent will be started up.
All supported MIB OIDs, including RMON MIB, can be accessed via SNMP manager. If the field
SNMP is set “Disable”, SNMP agent will be de-activated, the related Community Name, Trap
Host IP Address, Trap and all MIB counters will be ignored.

12-1 Configuration
This section describes how to configure SNMP System on the switch. This function is used toconfigure SNMP settings, community name, trap host and public traps as well as the throttleof SNMP. A SNMP manager must pass the authentication by identifying both community
names, then it can access the MIB information of the target device. So, both parties must havethe same community name. Once completing the setting, click <Apply> button, the setting
takes effect.

Web Interface
To configure the configure SNMP System in the web interface:
1.

Click SNMP and configuration.

2.

Evoke SNMP State to enable or disable the SNMP function.

3.

Specify the Read Community, Write Community.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 12-1: The SNMP Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Mode :
Indicates the SNMP mode operation. Possible modes are:on: Enable SNMP mode operation.
off: Disable SNMP mode operation.

⚫

Read Community :286

Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent. The allowed
string length is 1 to 31, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. If SNMP version is
SNMPv3, the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table. It
provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community
string. In addition to community string, a particular range of source addresses can be used
to restrict source subnet.
⚫

Write Community :Indicates the community write access string to permit access to SNMP agent. The allowed
string length is 1 to 31, and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
The field is applicable only when SNMP version is SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c. If SNMP version is
SNMPv3, the community string will be associated with SNMPv3 communities table. It
provides more flexibility to configure security name than a SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c community
string. In addition to community string, a particular range of source addresses can be used
to restrict source subnet.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

287

12-2 SNMPv3
12-2.1 Communities
Configure SNMPv3 community table on this page. The entry index key is Community.

Web Interface
To configure the configure SNMP Communities in the web interface:
1.

Click SNMP, SNMPv3 and Communities.

2.

Click Add New Entry.

3.

Specify the SNMP community parameters.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset.

Figure 12-2.1: The SNMPv3 Communities Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Community :Indicates the security name to map the community to the SNMP Groups configuration. The
allowed string length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

⚫

Source IP :Indicates the SNMP access source address. A particular range of source addresses can beused to restrict source subnet when combined with source mask.

⚫

Source IP Prefix :Indicates the SNMP access source address prefix.
Buttons⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add new entry. Specify the name and configure the new entry. Click "Apply".

⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

Apply :
288

Click to save changes.
⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

289

12-2.2 Users
The function is used to configure SNMPv3 user. The Entry index key is UserName. To create a
new UserName account, please check <Add new user> button, and enter the user
information then check <Apply>. Max Group Number: 6.

Web Interface
To configure SNMP Users in the web interface:
1.

Click SNMP, SNMPv3 and Users.

2.

Click Add new entry.

3.

Specify the SNMPv3 Users parameter.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 12-2.2: The SNMP Users Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Engine ID :An octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to. The string must
contain an even number(in hexadecimal format) with number of digits between 10 and 64,
but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed. The SNMPv3 architecture uses the User-based
Security Model (USM) for message security and the View-based Access Control Model (VACM)
for access control. For the USM entry, the usmUserEngineID and usmUserName are theentry's keys. In a simple agent, usmUserEngineID is always that agent's own snmpEngineID
value. The value can also take the value of the snmpEngineID of a remote SNMP engine withwhich this user can communicate. In other words, if user engine ID equal system engine IDthen it is local user; otherwise it's remote user.

⚫

User Name :A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string lengthis 1 to 31, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

⚫

Security Level :Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:
NoAuth, NoPriv: No authentication and no privacy.
290

Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and no privacy.
Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.
The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists. That means it must firstbe ensured that the value is set correctly.
⚫

Authentication Protocol :Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible
authentication protocols are:
MD5: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses MD5 authentication protocol.
SHA: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses SHA authentication protocol.
The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists. That means must firstensure that the value is set correctly.

⚫

Authentication Password :A string identifying the authentication password phrase. For MD5 authentication protocol,
the allowed string length is 8 to 39. For SHA authentication protocol, the allowed string
length is 8 to 39. The allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

⚫

Privacy Protocol :Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to. Possible privacy protocols are:
DES: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses DES authentication protocol.
AES: An optional flag to indicate that this user uses AES authentication protocol.

⚫

Privacy Password :A string identifying the privacy password phrase. The allowed string length is 8 to 31, andthe allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Buttons⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add new entry. Specify the name and configure the new entry. Click "Apply".

⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

291

12-2.3 Groups
The function is used to configure SNMPv3 group. The Entry index key are Security Model andSecurity Name. To create a new group account, please check <Add new group> button, andenter the group information then check <Apply>. Max Group Number:12.

Web Interface
To configure SNMP Groups in the web interface:
1.

Click SNMP, SNMPv3 and Groups.

2.

Click Add new entry.

3.

Specify the SNMP group parameter.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 12-2.3: The SNMP Groups Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Security Model :Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.
v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.
usm: User-based Security Model (USM).

⚫

Security Name :292

A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string
length is 1 to 31, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
⚫

Group Name :A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string
length is 1 to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.
Buttons⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add new entry. Specify the name and configure the new entry. Click "Apply".

⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

29312-2.4 Views
The function is used to configure SNMPv3 view. The Entry index keys are OID Subtree and View
Name. To create a new view account, please check <Add new view> button, and enter the view
information then click <Apply>. Max Group Number: 12.
Configure SNMPv3 view table on this page. The entry index keys are View Name and OID
Subtree.

Web Interface
To configure SNMP views in the web interface:
1.

Click SNMP, SNMPv3 and Views.

2.

Click Add new entry.

3.

Specify the SNMP View parameters.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset.

Figure 12-2.4: The SNMP Views Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

View Name :A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string lengthis 1 to 31, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

⚫

View Type :Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to. Possible view types are:Included: An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included.
Excluded: An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded.
In general, if a view entry's view type is 'excluded', there should be another view entry
existing with view type as 'included' and it's OID subtree should overstep the 'excluded' view
entry.

⚫

OID Subtree :The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view. The allowed OID length294

is 1 to 128. The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk(*).
Buttons⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add new entry. Specify the name and configure the new entry. Click "Apply".

⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

29512-2.5 Access
The function is used to configure SNMPv3 accesses. The Entry index key are Group Name,
Security Model and Security level. To create a new access account, please check <Add newaccess> button, and enter the access information then check <Apply>. Max Group Number :12.

Web Interface
To display the configure SNMP Access in the web interface:
1.

Click SNMP, SNMPv3 and Accesses.

2.

Click Add new entry.

3.

Specify the SNMP Access parameters.

4.

Click Apply.

5.

If you want to modify or clear the setting then click Reset.

Figure 12-2.5: The SNMP Accesses Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Group Name :A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to. The allowed string
length is 1 to 31, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

⚫

Security Model :Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:Any: Any security model accepted(v1|v2c|usm).
v1: Reserved for SNMPv1.
v2c: Reserved for SNMPv2c.
296

usm: User-based Security Model (USM).
⚫

Security Level :Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to. Possible security models are:
NoAuth, NoPriv: No authentication and no privacy.
Auth, NoPriv: Authentication and no privacy.
Auth, Priv: Authentication and privacy.

⚫

Read View Name :The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request thecurrent values. The allowed string length is 1 to 31, and the allowed content is ASCII
characters from 33 to 126.

⚫

Write View Name :The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentiallyset new values. The allowed string length is 1 to 31, and the allowed content is ASCII
characters from 33 to 126.
Buttons⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add new entry. Specify the name and configure the new entry. Click "Apply".

⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

29712-3 Statistics
12-3.1 Configuration
Configure RMON Statistics table on this page. The entry index key is ID.

Web Interface
To configure the RMON Statistics Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, RMON, Statistics and Configuration.

2.

Click Add New Entry.

3.

Specify the ID parameters.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 12-3.1: The RMON Statistics Configuration

Parameter description:
These parameters are displayed on the RMON Statistics Configuration page:⚫

ID :Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.

⚫

Data Source :Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored. If in stacking switch, the value must add
1000*(switch ID-1), for example, if the port is switch 3 port 5, the value is 2005
Buttons⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add a new entry.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.
298

12-3.2 Status
This page provides an overview of RMON Statistics entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries
from the Statistics table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field.
When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Statistics
table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Statistics table.
The "Start from Control Index" allows the user to select the starting point in the Statistics table.
Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest
Statistics table match.
The Next Entry will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next
lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table.
Use the First Entry button to start over.

Web Interface
To display a RMON Statistics Status in the web interface:
1.

Click Security, RMON, Statistics and Status.

2.

Specify Port which want to check.

3.

Checked “Auto-refresh”.

4.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the port detailed statistics.

Figure 12-3.2: The RMON Statistics Status

Parameter description:⚫

ID :Indicates the index of Statistics entry.

⚫

Data Source(if Index) :The port ID which wants to be monitored.

⚫

Drop :The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack ofresources.

⚫

Octets :The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network.

⚫

Pkts :The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets)received.

⚫

Broadcast :The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.

⚫

Multicast :299

The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.
⚫

CRC Errors :The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including
FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check
Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral
number of octets (Alignment Error).

⚫

Under-size :The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.

⚫

Over-size :The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.

⚫

Frag. :The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.

⚫

Jabb. :The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.

⚫

Coll. :The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.

⚫

64 Bytes :The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length.

⚫

65~127 :The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 to 127
octets in length.

⚫

128~255 :The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 128 to
255 octets in length.

⚫

256~511 :The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 256 to 511
octets in length.

⚫

512~1023 :The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 512 to 1023
octets in length.

⚫

1024~1588 :The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 to1588 octets in length.

⚫

Search :You can search for the information that you want to see.

⚫

Show entries :You can choose how many items you want to show off.
Buttons300

Figure 12-3.2: The RMON Statistics Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

Next :
Updates the system log entries, turn to the next page.

⚫

Previous :Updates the system log entries, turn to the previous page.

301

12-4 History
12-4.1 Configuration
Configure RMON History table on this page. The entry index key is ID.

Web Interface
To configure the RMON History Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click SNMP, History and Configuration.

2.

Click Add New Entry.

3.

Specify the ID parameters.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 12-4.1: The RMON History Configuration

Parameter description:
These parameters are displayed on the RMON History Configuration page:⚫

ID :Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.

⚫

Data Source :Indicates the port ID which wants to be monitored. If in stacking switch, the value must add
1000*(switch ID-1), for example, if the port is switch 3 port 5, the value is 2005⚫

Interval :Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling the history statistics data. The range is from 1
to 3600, default value is 1800 seconds.

⚫

Buckets :Indicates the maximum data entries associated this History control entry stored in RMON.
The range is from 1 to 3600, default value is 50.

⚫

Buckets Granted :The number of data shall be saved in the RMON.
302

Buttons⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add a new entry.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

30312-4.2 Status
This page provides an overview of RMON History entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries
from the History table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field.
When first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the History
table. The first displayed will be the one with the lowest History Index and Sample Index foundin the History table.
The "Start from History Index and Sample Index" allows the user to select the starting point in
the History table. Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from thator the next closest History table match.
The Next Entry will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next
lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table.
Use the First Entry button to start over.

Web Interface
To display a RMON History Status in the web interface:
1.

Click SNMP, History and Status.

2.

Checked “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the port detailed statistics.

4.

Click First Entry/Next Entry to change Entry.

Figure 12-4.2: The RMON History Status

Parameter description:⚫

History Index :Indicates the index of History control entry.

⚫

Sample Index :Indicates the index of the data entry associated with the control entry.

⚫

Sample Start :The value of sysUpTime at the start of the interval over which this sample was measured.

⚫

Drop :The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack ofresources.

⚫

Octets :The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network.

⚫

Pkts :The total number of packets (including bad packets, broadcast packets, and multicast packets)304

received.
⚫

Broadcast :The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address.

⚫

Multicast :The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address.

⚫

CRC Errors :The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including
FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had either a bad Frame Check
Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral
number of octets (Alignment Error).

⚫

Under-size :The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets.

⚫

Over-size :The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets.

⚫

Frag. :The number of frames which size is less than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.

⚫

Jabb. :The number of frames which size is larger than 64 octets received with invalid CRC.

⚫

Coll. :The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.

⚫

Utilization :The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during thissampling interval, in hundredths of a percent.

⚫

Show entries :You can choose how many items you want to show.
Buttons

Figure 12-4.2: The RMON History Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

First Entry :Updates the table starting from the first entry in the IPMC Profile Address Configuration.

⚫

Next Entry :Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

305

12-5 Alarm
12-5.1 Configuration
Configure RMON Alarm table on this page. The entry index key is ID.

Web Interface
To configure the RMON Alarm Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click SNMP, Alarm and Configuration.

2.

Click Add New Entry.

3.

Specify the ID parameters.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 12-5.1: The RMON Alarm Configuration

Parameter description:
These parameters are displayed on the RMON Alarm Configuration page:⚫

ID :Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.

⚫

Interval :Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling
threshold. The range is from 1 to 2^31-1.

⚫

Variable :Indicates the particular variable to be sampled, the possible variables are:
InOctets:
The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing characters.
InUcastPkts:
The number of uni-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
InNUcastPkts:
The number of broad-cast and multi-cast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
InDiscards:
The number of inbound packets that are discarded even the packets are normal.
306

InErrors:
The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being
deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
InUnknownProtos:
the number of the inbound packets that were discarded because of the unknown or unsupport protocol.
OutOctets:
The number of octets transmitted out of the interface , including framing characters.
OutUcastPkts:
The number of uni-cast packets that request to transmit.
OutNUcastPkts:
The number of broad-cast and multi-cast packets that request to transmit.
OutDiscards:
The number of outbound packets that are discarded event the packets is normal.
OutErrors:
The The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors.
OutQLen:
The length of the output packet queue (in packets).
⚫

Sample Type :The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be comparedagainst the thresholds, possible sample types are:Absolute: Get the sample directly.
Delta: Calculate the difference between samples (default).

⚫

Value :The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.

⚫

Startup Alarm :The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be comparedagainst the thresholds, possible sample types are:
RisingTrigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold.
FallingTrigger alarm when the first value is less than the falling threshold.
RisingOrFallingTrigger alarm when the first value is larger than the rising threshold or lessthan the falling threshold (default).

⚫

Rising Threshold :Rising threshold value (-2147483648-2147483647).

⚫

Rising Index :Rising event index (1-65535).

⚫

Falling Threshold :Falling threshold value (-2147483648-2147483647)⚫

Falling Index :Falling event index (1-65535).
Buttons⚫

Delete :307

Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.
⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add a new entry.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

308

12-5.2 Status
This page provides an overview of RMON Alarm entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries fromthe Alarm table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When first
visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Alarm table. The
first displayed will be the one with the lowest ID found in the Alarm table.
The "Start from Control Index" allows the user to select the starting point in the Alarm table.
Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the next closest
Alarm table match.
The Next Entry will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next
lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table.
Use the First Entry button to start over.

Web Interface
To display a RMON Alarm Status in the web interface:
1.

Click SNMP, Alarm and Status.

2.

Checked “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “Refresh” to refresh the port detailed statistics.

4.

Click First Entry/Next Entry to change Entry.

Figure 12-5.2: RMON Alarm Status

Parameter description:⚫

ID :Indicates the index of Alarm control entry.

⚫

Interval :Indicates the interval in seconds for sampling and comparing the rising and falling threshold.

⚫

Variable :Indicates the particular variable to be sampled⚫

Sample Type :The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be comparedagainst the thresholds.

⚫

Value :The value of the statistic during the last sampling period.

⚫

Startup Alarm :The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid.

⚫

Rising Threshold :309

Rising threshold value.
⚫

Rising Index :Rising event index.

⚫

Falling Threshold :Falling threshold value.

⚫

Falling Index :Falling event index.

⚫

Show entries :You can choose how many items you want to show off.
Buttons

Figure 12-5.2: RMON Alarm Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

First Entry :Updates the table starting from the first entry in the IPMC Profile Address Configuration.

⚫

Next Entry :Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

310

12-6 Event
12-6.1 Configuration
Configure RMON Event table on this page. The entry index key is ID.

Web Interface
To configure the RMON Event Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click SNMP, Event and Configuration.

2.

Click Add New Entry.

3.

Specify the ID parameters.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 12-6.1: The RMON Event Configuration

Parameter description:
These parameters are displayed on the RMON History Configuration page:⚫

ID :Indicates the index of the entry. The range is from 1 to 65535.

⚫

Desc :
Indicates this event, the string length is from 0 to 127, default is a null string.

⚫

Type :
Indicates the notification of the event, the possible types are:None: No SNMP log is created, no SNMP trap is sent.
Log: Create SNMP log entry when the event is triggered.
Snmp trap: Send SNMP trap when the event is triggered.
Log and trap: Create SNMP log entry and sent SNMP trap when the event is triggered.

⚫

Event Last Time :Indicates the value of sysUpTime at the time this event entry last generated an event.
Buttons311

⚫

Delete :Check to delete the entry. It will be deleted during the next save.

⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add a new entry.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

31212-6.2 Status
This page provides an overview of RMON Event table entries. Each page shows up to 99 entries
from the Event table, default being 20, selected through the "entries per page" input field. When
first visited, the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the Event table.
The first displayed will be the one with the lowest Event Index and Log Index found in the Eventtable.
The "Start from Event Index and Log Index" allows the user to select the starting point in the
Event table. Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the
next closest Event table match.
The Next Entry will use the last entry of the currently displayed entry as a basis for the next
lookup. When the end is reached the text "No more entries" is shown in the displayed table.
Use the First Entry button to start over.

Web Interface
To display a RMON Event Status in the web interface:
1.

Click SNMP, Event and Status.

2.

Checked “Auto-refresh”.

3.

Click “ Refresh“ to refresh the port detailed statistics

4.

Click First Entry/Next Entry to change Entry.

Figure 12-6.2: RMON Event Status

Parameter description:⚫

Event Index :Indicates the index of the event entry.

⚫

Log Index :Indicates the index of the log entry.

⚫

LogTIme :Indicates Event log time⚫

LogDescription :Indicates the Event description.

⚫

Show entries :You can choose how many items you want to show.
Buttons313

Figure 12-6.2: RMON Event Status buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

First Entry :Updates the table starting from the first entry in the IPMC Profile Address Configuration.

⚫

Next Entry :Updates the table, starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed.

314

Chapter 13MEP13-1 MEP Configuration
The Maintenance Entity Point instances are configured here.

Web Interface
To configure the MEP parameters in the web interface:
1.

Click MEP.

2.

Specify the Maintenance Entity Point parameters.

3.

Click Apply to apply the change.

Figure 13-1: The Maintenance Entity Point

Parameter description:⚫

Delete :This box is used to mark a MEP for deletion in next Save operation.

⚫

Instance :The ID of the MEP. Click on the ID of a MEP to enter the configuration page. The range isfrom 1through 3124.

⚫

Domain :Port: This is a MEP in the Port Domain.
VLAN: This is a MEP in the VLAN Domain. 'Flow Instance' is a VLAN. In case of Up-MEP the
VLAN must be created⚫

Mode :
MEP: This is a Maintenance Entity End Point.
MIP: This is a Maintenance Entity Intermediate Point.

⚫

Direction :Down: This is a Down MEP - monitoring ingress OAM and traffic on 'Residence Port'.
Up: This is a Up MEP - monitoring egress OAM and traffic on 'Residence Port'.

⚫

Residence Port :The port where MEP is monitoring - see 'Direction'. For a EVC MEP the port must be a port
in the EVC. For a VLAN MEP the port must be a VLAN member.
315

⚫

Level :The MEG level of this MEP.

⚫

Flow Instance :The MEP is related to this flow - See 'Domain'. This is not relevant and not shown in case of
Port MEP.

⚫

Tagged VID :Port MEP: An outer C/S-tag (depending on VLAN Port Type) is added with this VID. Entering'0' means no TAG added.
EVC MEP: This is not used.
VLAN MEP: This is not used.
EVC MIP: On Serval, this is the Subscriber VID that identify the subscriber flow in this EVC
where the MIP is active.

⚫

This MAC :The MAC of this MEP - can be used by other MEP when unicast is selected (Info only).

⚫

Alarm :
There is an active alarm on the MEP or operational state is not "Up".
Buttons⚫

Add New MEP :Click to add a new MEP entry.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

316Chapter 14

ERPS

The ERPS instances are configured here.

Web Interface
To configure the Ethernet Ring Protection Switching parameters in the web interface:
1.

Click ERPS.

2.

Specify the Ethernet Ring Protection Switching parameters.

3.

Click Apply to apply the change.

Figure 14: The Ethernet Ring Protection Switching

Parameter description:⚫

Delete :This box is used to mark an EPS for deletion in next save operation.

⚫

ERPS ID :The ID of the created Protection group, It must be an integer value between 1 and 64. The
maximum number of ERPS Protection Groups that can be created are 64. Click on the ID ofan Protection group to enter the configuration page.

⚫

Port 0 :This will create a Port 0 of the switch in the ring.

⚫

Port 1 :This will create "Port 1" of the switch in the Ring. As interconnected sub-ring will have only
one ring port, "Port 1" is configured as "0" for interconnected sub-ring. "0" in this fieldindicates that no "Port 1" is associated with this instance⚫

Port 0 SF MEP :The Port 0 Signal Fail reporting MEP.

⚫

Port 1 SF MEP :The Port 1 Signal Fail reporting MEP. As only one SF MEP is associated with interconnected
sub-ring without virtual channel, it is configured as "0" for such ring instances. "0" in this fieldindicates that no Port 1 SF MEP is associated with this instance.

⚫

Port 0 APS MEP :The Port 0 APS PDU handling MEP.

⚫

Port 1 APS MEP :317

The Port 1 APS PDU handling MEP. As only one APS MEP is associated with interconnected
sub-ring without virtual channel, it is configured as "0" for such ring instances. "0" in this fieldindicates that no Port 1 APS MEP is associated with this instance.
⚫

Ring Type :Type of Protecting ring. It can be either major ring or sub-ring.

⚫

Interconnected Node :Interconnected Node indicates that the ring instance is interconnected. Click on the checkbox
to configure this. "Yes" indicates it is an interconnected node for this instance. "No" indicatesthat the configured instance is not interconnected.

⚫

Virtual Channel :Sub-rings can either have virtual channel or not on the interconnected node. This isconfigured using "Virtual Channel" checkbox. "Yes" indicates it is a sub-ring with virtualchannel. "No" indicates, sub-ring doesn't have virtual channel.

⚫

Major Ring ID :Major ring group ID for the interconnected sub-ring. It is used to send topology change
updates on major ring. If ring is major, this value is same as the protection group ID of this
ring.

⚫

Alarm :
There is an active alarm on the ERPS.
Buttons

Figure 14: The Ethernet Ring Protection Switching buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

Add New Protection Group:
Click to add a new Protection group entry.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

318Chapter 15PTP

15-1 Configuration
This page allows the user to configure and inspect the current PTP clock settings.

Web Interface
To configure the PTP in the web interface:
1.

Click PTP and Configuraiton.

2.

Scroll to select the mode to enable or disable

3.

Specify the parameters in each blank field.

4.

Click the save to save the setting

5.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button.
It will revert to previously saved values

Figure 15-1: The PTP configuration

Parameter description:
PTP External Clock Configuration⚫

External Enable :This Selection box will allow you to configure the External Clock output.
The following values are possible:
1. True : Enable the external clock output
2. False : Disable the external clock output⚫

Adjust Method :This Selection box will allow you to configure the Frequency adjustment configuration.
1. LTC : Select Local Time Counter (LTC) frequency control
2. Single : Select SyncE DPLL frequency control, if allowed by SyncE
3. Independent : Select an oscillator independent of SyncE for frequency control, if supported319

by the HW
4. Common : Select second DPLL for PTP, Both DPLL have the same (SyncE recovered) clock.
4. Auto : AUTO Select clock control, based on PTP profile and available HW resources.
⚫

Clock Frequency :This will allow to set the Clock Frequency.
The possible range of values are 1 - 25000000 (1 - 25MHz)PTP Clock Configuration⚫

Delete :Check this box and click on 'Save' to delete the clock instance.

⚫

Clock Instance :Indicates the instance number of a particular Clock Instance [0..3].
Click on the Clock Instance number to edit the Clock details.

⚫

HW Domain :Indicates the HW clock domain used by the clock.

⚫

Device Type :Indicates the Type of the Clock Instance. There are five Device Types.
1. Ord-Bound - clock's Device Type is Ordinary-Boundary Clock.
2. P2p Transp - clock's Device Type is Peer to Peer Transparent Clock.
3. E2e Transp - clock's Device Type is End to End Transparent Clock.
4. Master Only - clock's Device Type is Master Only.
5. Slave Only - clock's Device Type is Slave Only.

⚫

Profile :Indicates the profile used by the clock.
Buttons⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add a new clock instance.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

32015-2 Status
This page allows the user to inspect the current PTP clock settings.

Web Interface
To display the PTP status in the web interface:
1.

Click PTP and Status.

2.

Specify the PTP parameters.

3.

Click Apply to apply the change.

Figure 15-2: The PTP Status

Parameter description:
PTP External Clock Description⚫

External Enable :Shows the current External clock output configuration.
True : Enable the external clock output
False : Disable the external clock output⚫

Adjust Method :Shows the current Frequency adjustment configuration.
LTC : Use Local Time Counter (LTC) frequency control
Single : Use SyncE DPLL frequency control, if allowed by SyncE
Independent : Use an oscillator independent of SyncE for frequency control, if supported by
the HW
Common : Use second DPLL for PTP, Both DPLL have the same (SyncE recovered) clock.
Auto : AUTO Select clock control, based on PTP profile and available HW resources.

⚫

Clock Frequency :Shows the current clock frequency used by the External Clock.
The possible range of values are 1 - 25000000 (1 - 25MHz)PTP Clock Description⚫

Inst :
321

Indicates the Instance of a particular Clock Instance [0..3].
Click on the Clock Instance number to monitor the Clock details.
⚫

ClkDom :Indicates the Clock domain used by the Instance of a particular Clock Instance [0..3].

⚫

Device Type :Indicates the Type of the Clock Instance. There are five Device Types.
Ord-Bound - Clock's Device Type is Ordinary-Boundary Clock.
P2p Transp - Clock's Device Type is Peer to Peer Transparent Clock.
E2e Transp - Clock's Device Type is End to End Transparent Clock.
Master Only - Clock's Device Type is Master Only.
Slave Only - Clock's Device Type is Slave Only.

⚫

Port List :Shows the ports configured for that Clock Instance.
Buttons

Figure 16-2: The PTP buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

322Chapter 16

Event Notification

16-1 SNMP Trap
Configure Trap on this page.

Web Interface
To configure SNMP Trap Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Event Notification and SNMP Trap.

2.
3.

Click Add New Entry then you can create new SNMP Trap on the switch.
Specify SNMP Trap parameter.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 16-1: The SNMP Trap Configuration

Parameter description:
Trap Destination Configurations⚫

Name :
Indicates the trap Configuration's name. Indicates the trap destination's name.

⚫

Enable :323

Indicates the trap destination mode operation. Possible modes are:Enabled: Enable SNMP trap mode operation.
Disabled: Disable SNMP trap mode operation.
⚫

Version :Indicates the SNMP trap supported version. Possible versions are:
SNMPv1: Set SNMP trap supported version 1.
SNMPv2c: Set SNMP trap supported version 2c.
SNMPv3: Set SNMP trap supported version 3.

⚫

Destination Address :Indicates the SNMP trap destination address. It allow a valid IP address in dotted decimal
notation ('x.y.z.w').
And it also allow a valid hostname. A valid hostname is a string drawn from the alphabet (AZa-z), digits (0-9), dot (.), dash (-). Spaces are not allowed, the first character must be an alphacharacter, and the first and last characters must not be a dot or a dash.
Indicates the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records
represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field(:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special syntax that can be used
as a shorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it canappear only once. It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example, '::192.1.2.34'.

⚫

Destination port :Indicates the SNMP trap destination port. SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this port,
the port range is 1~65535.
SNMP Trap Configuration⚫

Trap Config Name :Indicates which trap Configuration's name for configuring. The allowed string length is 1
to 32, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

⚫

Trap Mode :Indicates the SNMP mode operation. Possible modes are:on: Enable SNMP mode operation.
off: Disable SNMP mode operation.

⚫

Trap Version :Indicates the SNMP supported version. Possible versions are:
SNMP v1: Set SNMP supported version 1.
SNMP v2c: Set SNMP supported version 2c.
SNMP v3: Set SNMP supported version 3.

⚫

Trap Community :Indicates the community access string when sending SNMP trap packet. The allowed string
length is 0 to 63, and the allowed content is ASCII characters from 33 to 126.

⚫

Trap Destination Address :Indicates the SNMP trap destination address. It allow a valid IP address in dotted decimal
notation ('x.y.z.w').
And it also allow a valid hostname. A valid hostname is a string drawn from the alphabet (AZa-z), digits (0-9), dot (.), dash (-). Spaces are not allowed, the first character must be an alphacharacter, and the first and last characters must not be a dot or a dash.
Indicates the SNMP trap destination IPv6 address. IPv6 address is in 128-bit records
324represented as eight fields of up to four hexadecimal digits with a colon separating each field(:). For example, 'fe80::215:c5ff:fe03:4dc7'. The symbol '::' is a special syntax that can be used as ashorthand way of representing multiple 16-bit groups of contiguous zeros; but it can appear
only once. It can also represent a legally valid IPv4 address. For example, '::192.1.2.34'.
⚫

Trap Destination port :Indicates the SNMP trap destination port. SNMP Agent will send SNMP message via this port,
the port range is 1~65535.

⚫

Trap Security Engine ID :Indicates the SNMP trap security engine ID. SNMPv3 sends traps and informs using USM forauthentication and privacy. A unique engine ID for these traps and informs is needed. When
"Trap Probe Security Engine ID" is enabled, the ID will be probed automatically. Otherwise,
the ID specified in this field is used. The string must contain an even number(in hexadecimalformat) with number of digits between 10 and 64, but all-zeros and all-'F's are not allowed.

⚫

Trap Security Name :Indicates the SNMP trap security name. SNMPv3 traps and informs using USM forauthentication and privacy. A unique security name is needed when traps and informs areenabled.
Buttons⚫

Add New Entry :Click to add a new entry.

⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

32516-2 eMail
Configure SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) on this page. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol is
the message-exchange standard for the Internet.
The Switch is to be configured as a client of SMTP while the server is a remote device that will
receive messages from the switch that alarm events occurred.

Web Interface
To configure SMTP Configuration in the web interface:
1.
2.

Click Event Notification and eMail.
Specify SMTP Configuration parameter.

3.

Click Apply.

Figure 16-2: The SMTP Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Mail Server :The IP address or hostname of the mail server. IP address is expressed in dotted decimal
notation. This will be the device that sends out the mail for you⚫

User Name :Specify the username on the mail server.

⚫

Password :Specify the password of the user on the mail server.

⚫

Sender :Specify the sender name of the alarm mail.

⚫

Return Path :Specify the sender email address of the alarm mail. This address will be the "from" addresson the email message.

⚫

Email Address # :Specify the email address of the receiver.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
326

Click to save changes.
⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

327

16-3 Log
16-3.1 Syslog
The Syslog Configuration is a standard for logging program messages . It allows separation of
the software that generates messages from the system that stores them and the software thatreports and analyzes them. It can be used as well a generalized informational, analysis anddebugging messages. It is supported by a wide variety of devices and receivers across multiple
platforms.

Web Interface
To configure Syslog Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Event Notification, Log and Syslog.

2.

Evoke the Server Mode to enable it.

3.

Specify the syslog parameters include Server Address and Server Port.

4.

Click Apply.

Figure 16-3.1: The System Log configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Server Mode :Indicates the server mode operation. When the mode operation is enabled, the syslog
message will send out to syslog server. The syslog protocol is based on UDP communication
and received on UDP port 514 and the syslog server will not send acknowledgments backsender since UDP is a connectionless protocol and it does not provide acknowledgments.
The syslog packet will always send out even if the syslog server does not exist. Possible modes
are:Enabled: Enable server mode operation.
Disabled: Disable server mode operation.

⚫

Server Address :Indicates the IPv4 host address of syslog server. If the switch provide DNS feature, it also can be a domain name.

⚫

Server Port :Indicates the service port of syslog server.

Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
328

Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

329

16-3.2 View Log
This section describes that display the system log information of the switch

Web Interface
To display the log Information in the web interface:
1.

Click Event Notification, Log and View Log.

2.

Display the log information.

Figure 16-3.2: The System Log Information

Parameter description:⚫

ID :ID (>= 1) of the system log entry.

⚫

Level :
level of the system log entry. The following level types are supported:
Debug : debug level message.
Info : informational message.
Notice : normal, but significant, condition.
Warning : warning condition.
Error : error condition.
Crit : critical condition.
Alert : action must be taken immediately.
Emerg : system is unusable.
330

⚫

Time :
It will display the log record by device time. The time of the system log entry.

⚫

Message :It will display the log detail message. The message of the system log entry.

⚫

Search :You can search for the information that you want to see.

⚫

Show entries :You can choose how many items you want to show.
Buttons

Figure 16-3.2: View Log buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Updates the system log entries, starting from the current entry ID.

⚫

Clear :
Clear all the system log entries.

⚫

Next :
Updates the system log entries, turn to the next page.

⚫

Previous :Updates the system log entries, turn to the previous page.

331

16-4 Digital I/O
Configure the normal modes of digital input/output (DI/DO).

Web Interface
To configure the digital input/output:
1.

Click Event Notification and Digital I/O.

2.

Scroll to select the DI/DO Mode.

3.
.

Click the Apply to save the setting.

Figure 16-4: The Digital I/O Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Group Name :The name identifying the severity group.

⚫

DI Normal Mode
Set the normal mode of the digital input(DI). You can set it to High or Low.

⚫

DO Normal Mode
Set the normal mode of the digital output(DO). You can set it to Open or Close.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

332

16-5 Event Configuration
This page displays current trap event severity configurations. Trap event severity can also be
configured here.

Web Interface
To display the configure Trap Event Severity in the web interface:
1.

Click Event Notification and Event Configuration.

2.

Scroll to select the Group name and Severity Level.

3.

Click Enable to select different trap event.

4.

Click the Apply to save the setting.

5.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button. It will revert topreviously saved values.

.

Figure 16-5: The Event Severity Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Group Name :The name identifying the severity group.

⚫

Severity Level :Every group has an severity level. The following level types are supported:<0> Emergency: System is unusable.
<1> Alert: Action must be taken immediately.
<2> Critical: Critical conditions.
<3> Error: Error conditions.
<4> Warning: Warning conditions.
<5> Notice: Normal but significant conditions.
<6> Information: Information messages.
<7> Debug: Debug-level messages.

⚫

Syslog :Enable - Select this Group Name in Syslog.

⚫

Trap :
Enable - Select this Group Name in Trap.

⚫

Switch2go :Enable - Select this Group Name in Push Notification.
333

Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

334

Chapter 17

Diagnostics

This chapter provides a set of basic system diagnosis. These includes Ping, Traceroute,
Cable Diagnostics and port mirror.

17-1 Ping
This section allows you to issue ICMP Echo packets to troubleshoot Ipv4/6 connectivity issues.

Web Interface
To configure a PING in the web interface:
1.

Click Diagnostics and Ping.

2.

Specify IP Address, Ping Length, Ping Count, Ping Interval and Egress Interface.

3.

Click Start.

Figure 17-1: The ICMP Ping

Parameter description:⚫

IP Address :To specify the target IP Address of the Ping.
335

⚫

Ping Length :The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes.

⚫

Ping Count :The count of the ICMP packet. Values range from 1 time to 60 times.

⚫

Ping Interval :The interval of the ICMP packet. Values range from 0 second to 30seconds.

⚫

Egress Interface (Only for IPv6) :The VLAN ID (VID) of the specific egress IPv6 interface which ICMP packet goes.
The given VID ranges from 1 to 4094 and will be effective only when the corresponding IPv6
interface is valid.
When the egress interface is not given, PING6 finds the best match interface for destination.
Do not specify egress interface for loopback address.
Do specify egress interface for link-local or multicast address.
Buttons⚫

Start :
Click the “Start” button to start to ping the target IP Address.

⚫

New Ping :Back to ICMP Ping page.

336

17-2 Traceroute
This page allows you to issue ICMP, TCP, or UDP packets to diagnose network connectivity
issues.

Web Interface
To start a Traceroute in the web interface:
1.

Click Diagnostics and Traceroute.

2.

Specify IP Address, Wait Time, Max TTL and Probe Count.

3.

Click Start.

Figure 17-2: The Traceroute

Parameter description:⚫

IP Address :The destination IP Address.

⚫

Wait Time :Set the time (in seconds) to wait for a response to a probe (default 5.0 sec). Values range
from 1 to 60. The payload size of the ICMP packet. Values range from 2 bytes to 1452 bytes.

⚫

Max TTL :Specifies the maximum number of hops (max time-to-live value) traceroute will probe. Values
range from 1 to 255. The default is 30.

⚫

Probe Count :Sets the number of probe packets per hop. Values range from 1 to 10. The default is 3.
Buttons⚫

Start :
Click the “Start” button to start to traceroute the target IP Address.
337

⚫

New Ping :Back to Traceroute page.

338

17-3 Cable Diagnostics
This section shows how to run Cable Diagnostics for copper ports.

Web Interface
To configure a Cable Diagnostics Configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Diagnostics and Cable Diagnostics.

2.

Specify Port which want to check.

3.

Click Start.

Figure 17-3: The Cable Diagnostics

Parameter description:⚫

Port :The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics.

⚫

Copper Port :Copper port number.

⚫

Link Status :The status of the cable.
10M: Cable is link up and correct. Speed is 10Mbps
100M: Cable is link up and correct. Speed is 100Mbps
1G: Cable is link up and correct. Speed is 1Gbps
Link Down: Link down or cable is not correct.

⚫

Test Result :Test Result of the cable.
OK: Correctly terminated pair
Abnormal: Incorrectly terminated pair or link down⚫

Length :The length (in meters) of the cable pair. The resolution is 3 meters. When Link Status is shownas follow, the length has different definition.
1G: The length is the minimum value of 4-pair.
10M/100M: The length is the minimum value of 2-pair.
Link Down: The length is the minimum value of non-zero of 4-pair.
339

Button⚫

Start :Start to cable diagnostics the port that you selected.

340

17-4 Mirroring
You can mirror traffic from any source port to a target port for real-time analysis. You canthen attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the target port and study the traffic crossing
the source port in a completely unobtrusive manner.
Mirror Configuration is to monitor the traffic of the network. For example, we assume that PortA and Port B are Monitoring Port and Monitored Port respectively, thus, the traffic received by
Port B will be copied to Port A for monitoring.

Web Interface
To configure the Port Mirror function in the web interface:
1.

Click Diagnostics and Mirroring.

2.

Select the Monitor Destination Port (Mirror Port).

3.

Select mode (disabled, enable, TX Only and RX only) for each monitored port.

4.

Click the Apply button to save the setting.

5.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button to revert topreviously saved values.

Figure 17-4: The Mirror Configuration

Parameter description:⚫

Monitor Destination Port :Port to output the mirrored traffic. Also known as the mirror port. Frames from ports thathave either source (rx) or destination (tx) mirroring enabled are mirrored on this port.

Mirror Source Port Configuration
The following table is used for Rx and Tx enabling.
⚫

Port :The logical port for the settings contained in the same row.

⚫

Mode :
Select mirror mode.
Rx only : Frames received on this port are mirrored on the mirror port. Frames transmitted341

are not mirrored.
Tx only : Frames transmitted on this port are mirrored on the mirror port. Frames received
are not mirrored.
Disabled : neither frames transmitted nor frames received are mirrored.
Enabled : Frames received and frames transmitted are mirrored on the mirror port.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

342

17-5 sFlow
17-5.1 Configuration
The sFlow Collector configuration for the switch can be monitored and modified here. The
configuration is divided into two parts: Configuration of the sFlow receiver (a.k.a. sFlow
collector) and configuration of per-port flow and counter samplers.
sFlow configuration is not persisted to non-volatile memory, which means that a reboot ormaster change will disable sFlow sampling.

Web Interface
To configure the sFlow in the web interface:
1.

Click Diagnostics, sFlow and Configuration.

2.

Set the sFlow parameters.

3.

Click apply to save the setting.

4.

If you want to cancel the setting then you need to click the Reset button.
It will revert to previously saved values.

Figure 17-5.1: The sFlow Configuration

Parameter description:
Agent Configuration⚫

IP Address :343

The IP address used as Agent IP address in sFlow datagrams. It serves as a unique key thatwill identify this agent over extended periods of time.
Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported.
Receiver Configuration⚫

Owner :
Basically, sFlow can be configured in two ways: Through local management using the Web
or CLI interface or through SNMP. This read-only field shows the owner of the current
sFlow configuration and assumes values as follows:• If sFlow is currently unconfigured/unclaimed, Owner contains <none>.
• If sFlow is currently configured through Web or CLI, Owner contains <Configured throughlocal management>.
• If sFlow is currently configured through SNMP, Owner contains a string identifying thesFlow receiver.
If sFlow is configured through SNMP, all controls - except for the Release-button - aredisabled to avoid inadvertent reconfiguration.
The Release button allows for releasing the current owner and disable sFlow sampling. The
button is disabled if sFlow is currently unclaimed. If configured through SNMP, the releasemust be confirmed (a confirmation request will appear).

⚫

IP Address/Hostname :The IP address or hostname of the sFlow receiver. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses aresupported.

⚫

UDP Port :The UDP port on which the sFlow receiver listens to sFlow datagrams. If set to 0 (zero), thedefault port (6343) is used.

⚫

Timeout :The number of seconds remaining before sampling stops and the current sFlow owner isreleased. While active, the current time left can be updated with a click on the Refresh-button.
If locally managed, the timeout can be changed on the fly without affecting any other settings.

⚫

Max. Datagram Size :The maximum number of data bytes that can be sent in a single sample datagram. Thisshould be set to a value that avoids fragmentation of the sFlow datagrams. Valid range is
200 to 1468 bytes with default being 1400 bytes.
Port Configuration⚫

Port :The port number for which the configuration below applies.

⚫

Flow Sampler Enabled :Enables/disables flow sampling on this port.

⚫

Flow Sampler Sampling Rate :The statistical sampling rate for packet sampling. Set to N to sample on average 1/Nth of thepackets transmitted/received on the port.
Not all sampling rates are achievable. If an unsupported sampling rate is requested, theswitch will automatically adjust it to the closest achievable. This will be reported back in thisfield.

⚫

Flow Sampler Max. Header :The maximum number of bytes that should be copied from a sampled packet to the sFlow
344

datagram. Valid range is 14 to 200 bytes with default being 128 bytes.
If the maximum datagram size does not take into account the maximum header size, samples
may be dropped.
⚫

Counter Poller Enabled :Enables/disables counter polling on this port.

⚫

Counter Poller Interval :With counter polling enabled, this specifies the interval - in seconds - between counter poller
samples.
Buttons⚫

Apply :
Click to save changes.

⚫

Reset :
Click to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values.

⚫

Release :See description under Owner.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page. Note that unsaved changes will be lost.

345

17-5.2 Statistics
This session shows receiver and per-port sFlow statistics

Web Interface
To Display port sFlow statistics in the web interface:
1.

Click Diagnostics, sFlow and statistics.

2.

Display sFlow information.

Figure 17-5.2: The sFlow Statistics

Parameter description:
Receiver Statistics⚫

Owner :
This field shows the current owner of the sFlow configuration. It assumes one of threevalues as follows:• If sFlow is currently unconfigured/unclaimed, Owner contains <none>.
• If sFlow is currently configured through Web or CLI, Owner contains <Configured throughlocal management>.
• If sFlow is currently configured through SNMP, Owner contains a string identifying thesFlow receiver.`⚫

IP Address/Hostname :The IP address or hostname of the sFlow receiver.

⚫

Timeout :346

The number of seconds remaining before sampling stops and the current sFlow owner isreleased.
⚫

Tx Successes :The number of UDP datagrams successfully sent to the sFlow receiver.

⚫

Tx Errors :The number of UDP datagrams that has failed transmission.
The most common source of errors is invalid sFlow receiver IP/hostname configuration. To
diagnose, paste the receiver's IP address/hostname into the Ping Web page (Diagnostics →Ping/Ping6).

⚫

Flow Samples :The total number of flow samples sent to the sFlow receiver.

⚫

Counter Samples :The total number of counter samples sent to the sFlow receiver.

Port Statistics⚫

Port :The port number for which the following statistics applies.

⚫

Rx and Tx Flow Samples :The number of flow samples sent to the sFlow receiver originating from this port. Here, flow
samples are divided into Rx and Tx flow samples, where Rx flow samples contains the numberof packets that were sampled upon reception (ingress) on the port and Tx flow samples
contains the number of packets that were sampled upon transmission (egress) on the port.

⚫

Counter Samples :The total number of counter samples sent to the sFlow receiver originating from this port.
Buttons

Figure 17-5.2: The sFlow Statistics buttons⚫

Auto-refresh :Check this box to refresh the page automatically. Automatic refresh occurs every 3 seconds.

⚫

Refresh :Click to refresh the page immediately.

⚫

Clear Receiver :Clears the sFlow receiver counters.

⚫

Clear Ports :Clears the per-port counters.

347

Chapter 18

MaintenanceThis chapter describes the entire Maintenance configuration tasks including
Save/Backup/Restore/Activate/Delete Restart Device, Factory Defaults, Firmware
upgrade.

18-1 Configuration

The switch stores its configuration in a number of files in text format. The files are either virtual(RAM-based) or stored in flash on the switch.
There are three system files:◼

running-config: A virtual file that represents the currently active configuration on theswitch. This file is volatile.

◼

startup-config: The startup configuration for the switch, read at boot time.

◼

default-config: A read-only file with vendor-specific configuration. This file is read when
the system is restored to default settings.

18-1.1 Save startup-config
This copy running-config to startup-config, thereby ensuring that the current active
configuration will be used at the next reboot.

Web Interface
To save running configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Maintenance, Configuration and Save startup-config.

2.

Click Save Configuration.

Figure 18-1.1: The Save Startup Configuration

348

Parameter description:
Button⚫

Save Configuration :Click to save configuration, the running configuration will be written to flash memory forsystem boot up to load this startup configuration file.

349

18-1.2 Backup
This section describes how to export the Switch Configuration for maintenance needs. Any
current configuration files will be exported as text format.
The configuration files on the switch can be backed up and saved on the station running the
web browser.
It is possible to transfer any of the files on the switch to the web browser. Select the runningconfig may take a little while to complete, as the file must be prepared before backup.

Web Interface
To backup configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Maintenance, Configuration and Backup.

2.

Click Backup.

Figure 18-1.2: Backup

Parameter description:⚫

running-config :A virtual file that represents the currently active configuration on the switch. This file isvolatile.

⚫

startup-config :The startup configuration for the switch, read at boot time.

⚫

default-config :A read-only file with vendor-specific configuration. This file is read when the system isrestored to default settings.
Button⚫

Download Configuration :Click the button then the switch will start to transfer the configuration file to yourworkstation.

350

18-1.3 Restore
It is possible to import a file from the web browser to all the files on the switch, except
default-config, which is read-only.
Select the source file to restore, and select the destination file on the target.
If the destination is running-config, the file will be applied to the switch configuration. Thiscan be done in two ways:◼

Replace mode: The current configuration is fully replaced with the configuration specified
in the source file.

◼

Merge mode: The source file configuration is merged into running-config.

Web Interface
To restore configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Maintenance, Configuration and Restore.

2.

Click Restore.

BrowseFigure 18-1.3: Restore Config

Parameter description:⚫

running-config :A virtual file that represents the currently active configuration on the switch. This file isvolatile.
Replace mode: The current configuration is fully replaced with the configuration in the
uploaded file.
Merge mode: The uploaded file is merged into running-config.

⚫

startup-config :The startup configuration for the switch, read at boot time.

⚫

Create new file :To create new files.
351

Parameter description:
Buttons⚫

Browse :Click the button to search the configuration text file and filename⚫

Upload Configuration :Click the button to start transfer the source file to the destination file.

352

18-1.4 Activate
It is possible to activate any of the configuration files present on the switch, except for
running-config which represents the currently active configuration.
Select the file to activate and click. This will initiate the process of completely replacing theexisting configuration with that of the selected file.

Web Interface
To activate configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Maintenance, Configuration and Activate .

2.

Click Activate Select.

Figure 18-1.4: Configuration Activation

Parameter description:
Buttons⚫

Activate Configuration :Click the “Activate Configuration” button then the selected file will be activated to be theswitch's running configuration.

353

18-1.5 Delete
It is possible to delete any of the writable files stored in flash, including startup-config. If thisis done and the switch is rebooted without a prior save operation, this effectively resets theswitch to default configuration.

Web Interface
To delete configuration in the web interface:
1.

Click Maintenance, Configuration and Delete.

2.

Click Delete Select.

Figure 18-1.5: Delete Configuration

Parameter description:
Buttons⚫

Delete Configuration File:Click the “Delete Configuration File” button then the selected file will be deleted.

354

18-2 Restart Device
This section describes how to restart the device for any maintenance needs. Any configuration
files or scripts that you saved in the switch should still be available afterwards.

Web Interface
To Restart Device in the web interface:
1.

Click Maintenance and Restart Device.

2.

Click Yes.

Figure 18-2: Restart Device

Parameter description:
Restart Device :You can restart the switch on this page. After restart, the switch will boot normally.
Buttons⚫

Yes :Click to “Yes” then the device will restart.

⚫

No :Click to cancel the opeation.

355

18-3 Factory Defaults
This section describes how to restore the Switch configuration to Factory Defaults.

Web Interface
To restore a Factory Defaults in the web interface:
1.

Click Maintenance and Factory Defaults.

2.

You can choose if you want to keep ip configuration or not.

3.

Click Yes.

Figure 18-3: The Factory Defaults

Parameter description:
Buttons⚫

Keep IP Configuration :Choose if you want to keep ip configuration or not.

⚫

Yes :
Click to “Yes” button to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults.

⚫

No :Click to cancel the operation.

356

18-4 Firmware
This section describes how to upgrade (or update) Firmware.

18-4.1 Firmware UpgradeThis page facilitates an update of the firmware controlling the switch..

Web Interface
To update firmware of the device in the web interface:
1.

Click Maintenance, Firmware and Firmware Upgrade.

2.

Click Upload.

BrowseFigure 18-4.1 The firmware upgrade

Parameter description:⚫

Browse :Click the “Browse” button to search the Firmware URL and filename.

357

18-4.2 Firmware Selection
This page provides information about the active and alternate (backup) firmware images in thedevice, and allows you to activate the alternate image.
The web page displays two tables with information about the active and alternate firmware
images.

Web Interface
To show the Firmware information or swap booting firmware in the web interface:
1.

Click Maintenance, Firmware and Firmware Selection.

2.

Click Activate Alternate Image

Figure 18-4.2 The Firmware selection

Image Information⚫

Image :
The file name of the firmware image, from when the image was last updated.

⚫

Version :The version of the firmware image.

⚫

Date :The date where the firmware was produced.
Buttons⚫

Activate Alternate Image :Click to use the “Activate Alternate Image”. This button may be disabled depending on
system state.

⚫

Cancel :Cancel activating the alternate image. Navigates away from this page.

358